Accellos - Guide - WebDispatch - Manual

Accellos One Warehouse
Powered by RADIO BEACON
Using Web Dispatch

Accellos Inc.
125 Commerce Valley Drive West, Suite 700
Markham, Ontario, Canada
L3T 7W4
Copyright Accellos, Inc.

All rights reserved
This manual is reserved for licensed users of Accellos One Warehouse. If you are not a licensed user of
Accellos One Warehouse, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written consent of Accellos, Inc.
The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without
notice and should not be construed as a commitment of Accellos, Inc. Accellos, Inc. assumes no respon-
sibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual.
U S I NG R A D I O B EA C O N W EB D I S P A T C H
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
About Optional Software Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Getting Additional Information and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Total Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Contacting Radio Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
CHAPTER 1
USING THE WEB DISPATCH INTERFACE
Starting Web Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About the Web Dispatch Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
About the Orders Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
About the Receiving Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
About the Reports Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Navigating Web Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Refreshing Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Configuring Screen Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Understanding the Status and Quick Launch Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Using the Orders Summary Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Order Details Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using Report Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting and Processing Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Selecting Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Processing Orders from Details Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Processing Orders from Report Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Using Pop-up Menu Actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
General Procedures for Processing Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Editing Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exiting Web Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
I I I
U S I N G R A D I O B E A C O N W E B D I S P A T C H
CHAPTER 2
PROCESSING SALES ORDERS
About Processing Sales Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Understanding Sales Order Actions and Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Understanding the Packslip Report Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Understanding Types of Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Additional Sales Order Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Allocating and Re-allocating Sales Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Understanding and Modifying Sales Order Allocation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Understanding Sales Order Allocation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Handling Unsuccessfully Allocated Sales Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Unallocating Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Understanding and Modifying Shipping Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Understanding and Modifying Shipping Method Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Understanding and Modifying Label Printing Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Understanding and Modifying Truck Route Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Understanding and Modifying Shipment Consolidation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Understanding and Modifying Carton Check-In Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Pre-rating Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Waving and Re-waving Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Understanding and Modifying Wave Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Packing and Holding Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Consolidating Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Understanding Wave Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Unwaving Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Understanding and Modifying the Unwave Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Performing Shipping Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Performing or Bypassing Carton Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Performing Shipping System Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Suspending Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Unsuspending Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Cancelling or Expediting Sales Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Understanding and Modifying Sales Order Nuke Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Understanding Nuking Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Generating Bills of Lading and Manifests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Adding an Order to a Bill of Lading/Manifest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Viewing, Editing, and Printing an Existing Bill of Lading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
I V
Picking a Sales Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Creating Deliveries In RADIO BEACON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Understanding the Create Delivery Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Creating a Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Using Clone Picking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cancelling Clone Picking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Exporting Manifest Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
CHAPTER 3
PROCESSING ASSEMBLY ORDERS
About Processing Assembly Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Understanding Assembly Order Actions and Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Understanding the Work Order Packslip Report Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Understanding Types of Assembly Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Allocating and Re-allocating Work Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Understanding and Modifying Work Order Replenishment Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Understanding Work Order Allocation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Unallocating Work Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cancelling Work Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Understanding and Modifying Work Order Nuke Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
CHAPTER 4
PROCESSING PACKAGING ORDERS
About Processing Packaging Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Understanding Types of Packaging Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Understanding Packaging Order Actions and Statuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Creating Packaging Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Working with the Packaging Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Generating the Packaging Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Understanding the Packaging Order Packslip Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
V
CHAPTER 5
PROCESSING PURCHASE ORDERS AND RETURNS
About Processing Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Understanding Purchase Order Actions and Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Understanding the Purchase Order Report Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Understanding Types of Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Additional Purchase Order Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Releasing Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Closing Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Cancelling or Expediting Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Understanding and Modifying Delete Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Creating Container References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Entering RMAs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Receiving a Purchase Order in Web Dispatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Creating Transfer Purchase Orders in Web Dispatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
CHAPTER 6
USING INCIDENTS
About Incidents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Creating and Assigning Incidents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Creating an Incident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Viewing Incidents You Have Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Viewing and Responding to Incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Viewing Incidents Assigned to You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Responding to an Incident. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
CHAPTER 7
GENERATING REPORTS
About Reports, Monitors, and Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
About the Standard Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Additional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
General Procedures for Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
V I
Managing Sales and Shipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Customer Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Packslip Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Order Consolidation Opportunities Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Shipping Errors Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Truck Route Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Uploaded Shipments Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Daily Shipping Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Shipment Lookup Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Manifest Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Managing Purchasing and Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Vendor Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Vendor Product List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Shortage Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Purchase Order Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Receiving Report by PO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
View Container Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Uploaded Receipts Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Daily Receiving Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Daily Receipts Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
RMA Issued Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Managing Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Products Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Product Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Product Inventory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Bin Detail Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Bin Inventory Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Empty Bin Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
License Plate Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Cycle Count Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Adjustments Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Short Products Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Rush Products Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Replenishment Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
V I I
Reserved Stock Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Open Warehouse Transits Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Picked, Unshipped Inventory Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Daily Sales Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Top 100 Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Velocity by Bin Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Incremental Slotting Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Monitoring Warehouse Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Activity Monitor Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Measuring Warehouse Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Cycle Count Accuracy Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Activity Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Picker Activity Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Employee Statistics Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Cycle Time Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Generating Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Ad Hoc SQL Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
CHAPTER 8
EDITING ORDERS AND WAREHOUSE DATA
Editing Sales, Work, Packaging and Transfer Sales Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/Packaging
Order Information 261
Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/Packaging Order Line Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Editing Purchase Orders and Transfer Purchase Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Editing Purchase Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Editing or Deleting Purchase Order Line Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Maintaining Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Modifying Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Adding a New Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Maintaining Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Editing an Existing Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adding a Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Deleting a Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Maintaining Packaging Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Adding a Packaging Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Editing an Existing Packaging item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Deleting a Packaging Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
V I I I
Maintaining Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Modifying Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Adding a New Customer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Maintaining Vendors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Modifying Vendor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Adding a New Vendor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
CHAPTER 9
ENTERING ORDERS
Entering Sales Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Creating a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Adding Lines to a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Completing a Sales Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Modifying or Deleting a Line in a Sales Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Entering Transfer Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Creating a Transfer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Adding Lines to a Transfer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Completing a Transfer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Modifying or Deleting a Line in a Transfer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Entering Purchase Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Adding Lines to a Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Completing a Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Entering Packaging Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
CHAPTER 10
USING ADVANCE REPLENISHMENT
Understanding Advance Replenishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Min/Max Replenishment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Days on Hand Replenishment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Running the Advance Replenishment Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Understanding and Modifying Advance Replenishment Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
I X
CHAPTER 11
TROUBLESHOOTING
Using the Log Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Generating the Log Lookup Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Generating the Log Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Generating the Errors Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Creating a Test Order Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
X
ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT
This manual provides conceptual information and step-by-step operational procedures for the
RADIO BEACON WMS Web Dispatch application.
It is highly recommended that you read the introductory companion manual, Overview of
RADIO BEACON WMS before working with the procedures contained in this manual.
AUDIENCE
This document is intended for the following readers:
Warehouse supervisors or managers, who use the RADIO BEACON WMS Web Dispatch
application for daily warehouse operations and management.
Radio Beacon Inc. partners and resellers, and warehouse system administrators or IT
managers, who need to understand RADIO BEACON WMS functions for the purposes of
system installation, setup, and ongoing configuration.
This manual assumes some familiarity with basic warehousing concepts, but not necessarily
with concepts or terminology that are specific to warehouse management systems (WMS) or to
RADIO BEACON WMS.
X I
U SI NG R AD I O B E A C O N W E B D I S P A T C H
ABOUT OPTIONAL SOFTWARE MODULES

RADIO BEACON WMS is shipped and licensed as a modular product. This means that the
version of RADIO BEACON WMS that you are using may not include all of the features
described in this document. The RADIO BEACON WMS documentation set is based on the core
modules, plus the Order Management and Web Dispatch modules. Wherever optional features
are discussed that are not included in the core, Order Management, or Web Dispatch modules
of RADIO BEACON WMS, an icon indicates the relevant module which you must purchase to be
able to use this feature. If your system does not include that module, you can easily skip over
the material that does not apply to your implementation. The following table lists the optional
modules that are documented, and the icons that represent each module.
Icon Module
Multi-Location/Site Transfer
LOC
Multi-Zone
ZONE
Multi-Company/Third-Party Logistics
3PL
Lots/Serials/Expiry
ATT
Kitting
KIT
Packaging
PACK
Container Receiving
RECV
X I I A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T
Icon Module
Putaway/Slotting/Cube/Weight
PUT
Advance/Min-Max Replenishment
REPLEN
Web Order Entry

O/E
Integrated Shipping/End-of-Line Settings

SHIP
Returned Materials Authorizations

RMA
Demand Forecasting
FCAST
Vendor Portal and Cross Docking

VPCD
RFID
RFID
Carousel/Conveyor
CA/CO
Note: Operations pertaining to the Carousels/Conveyors, the RFID module or the Cross
Docking modules are not documented in this manual.
X I I I
GETTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND

SUPPORT
The following manuals contain additional information about RADIO BEACON components:
Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS
Using RADIO BEACON Handheld Functions
TOTAL SUPPORT WEB SITE
You can find additional documentation on the Radio Beacon Total Support Web site,
http://002.radiobeacon.com. This site is updated regularly with supplementary detailed
information on specific topics and common issues.
CONTACTING RADIO BEACON
You can contact Radio Beacon Inc. Customer Support by telephone, fax, or e-mail. Be sure to
have ready your company name, the version of RADIO BEACON WMS you are using and a
concise description of the problem you are experiencing.
Radio Beacon Support
Telephone: 1-(800) 247-9526 Ext. 2
Fax: (416) 486-2169
E-mail: support@radiobeacon.com
X I V A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T
DOCUMENT CONVENTIONS
The following formatting conventions are used throughout this document:
Convention Explanation
Initial Caps Indicates the name of a RADIO BEACON WMS function.
Example:
The cartons are sent to the shipping area and, optionally, weighed and
scanned with the Carton Shipping function.
ALL CAPS Indicates a RADIO BEACON WMS system name, such as a bin location or
an order or carton status.
Example:
The order is in the status of SUSPENDED and cannot be processed further
until it is released.
Bold text Indicates text that appears in screen options such as buttons, menus, text
boxes, and so on.
In the Product field, enter the product number.
monospace Indicates text that you must enter exactly as shown.

text
Example:
Enter the IP address or machine name of the server running the Web
Dispatch thread, or enter localhost if you are running Internet
Explorer on the server machine.
italics Indicates a newly introduced term, emphasis, or a manual title.
Example:
It cannot be further processed until the dispatcher unsuspends it.
> Indicates the start of a procedure.
Example:
> To start picking an order:
X V
X V I A B O U T T H I S D O C U M E N T
U S I N G R A D I O B EA C O N W EB D I S P A T C H
1 USING THE WEB DISPATCH

INTERFACE
This chapter describes how to the start Web Dispatch, how to navigate and interact with its
modules, how to edit default action settings, and how to find relevant information in this
manual:
Starting Web Dispatch on page 2.
About the Web Dispatch Modules on page 4.
Navigating Web Dispatch on page 7.
Selecting and Processing Orders on page 40.
Editing Default Settings on page 46.
Exiting Web Dispatch on page 48.
1
STARTING WEB DISPATCH

> To log on to Web Dispatch:
1. Start Internet Explorer.
2. In the address bar, enter the url of the Web dispatch component using the following format:
http://<server IP address or Name>/RbDispatch/
where:
<server IP address or Name> is the IP address or machine name of the server
running the Web Dispatch component
or,
enter localhost if you are running Internet Explorer on the same machine that you
installed the Web Dispatch component.
For example,
http://10.142.154.13/RbDispatch/
http://localhost/RbDispatch/
The RADIO BEACON WMS login screen is displayed.
2 CHAPTER 1 U S I N G T H E W E B D I S P A T C H I N T E R F A C E
3. In the User Name field, enter your user ID.
4. In the Password field, enter your password.
If you have no data of your own, you can initially use the following default User Names
and Passwords, which are installed with RADIO BEACON WMS, until you define your own
Password and Permissions.
User Name Password

HH (none)
Web (none)
inter inter
There is also a default sa user name that is used to log on to the administrative functions
on Web Dispatch. The administrative functions are not discussed in this manual.
5. Optionally, in the Language field, select the language you want the interface to display.
6. Click Log In. The Web Dispatch home page is displayed, with the navigation bar at the top
of the screen.
S T AR T I N G W E B D I S P A T C H 3
ABOUT THE WEB DISPATCH MODULES

From the Web Dispatch navigation bar, you can access the following modules by clicking on
the appropriate link:
Orders See About the Orders Module on page 5.
Receiving See About the Receiving Module on page 5.
Monitor Use to monitor current processes in the warehouse. See Monitoring

Warehouse Activities on page 250 of Chapter 7, Generating Reports.
Incidents Use to enter queries or issues to be handled by other Web Dispatch users, and
respond to incidents that have been assigned to you. See Chapter 6, Using Incidents.
Reports See About the Reports Module on page 6.
Support Links to the Radio Beacon Total Support Web site.
Exit Logs off from Web Dispatch. See Exiting Web Dispatch on page 48 of this
chapter.
The navigation bar is available in each module; to enter a different module, simply click on the
link in the navigation bar.
Note: The modules that you are able to view will depend on your permissions. You may or
may not have access to all of the modules described here.
In general, navigating a module consists of clicking hyperlinks and selecting form elements,
just as in any Web site on the Internet. The Orders and Receiving modules, however, use an
additional feature, a pop-up menu, which is described later in this chapter.
ABOUT THE ORDERS MODULE
Use the Orders module to do any of the following:
View and process sales, work, packaging and transfer sales orders. Described throughout
Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders, Chapter 3, Processing Assembly Orders, and
Chapter 4, Processing Packaging Orders.
Troubleshoot sales, work, packaging and transfer sales orders. See About the Reports
Module on page 6.
Edit existing sales, transfer sales, work and packaging orders. Described in Editing Sales,
Work, Packaging and Transfer Sales Orders on page 260 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders
and Warehouse Data.
SHIP Generate and print bills of lading and manifests. Described in Generating Bills of Lading
and Manifests on page 125.
ABOUT THE RECEIVING MODULE
Use the Receiving module to do any of the following:
View and process purchase orders and transfer purchase orders. Described throughout
Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders and Returns.
Edit existing purchase orders and transfer purchase orders. Described in Editing Purchase
Orders and Transfer Purchase Orders on page 263 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data.
Troubleshoot purchase orders. See About the Reports Module below.
A B O U T T H E W E B D I S P A T C H M O D U L E S 5
ABOUT THE REPORTS MODULE
You use the Reports module to do any of the following:
Generate various real-time and historical reports and monitor warehouse processes and
productivity. Described throughout Chapter 7, Generating Reports.
View license plate related information. Described in Chapter 7, Generating Reports.
View, process, and edit sales, work, packaging, purchase and transfer orders. See About
the Orders Module on page 5 and About the Receiving Module on page 5.
Troubleshoot orders, products, and bins. Described in Chapter 11, Troubleshooting.
RECV Create container references for purchase orders. Described in Creating Container
References on page 182 of Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders and Returns.
REPLEN Generate advance replenishment requests. Described in Chapter 6, Using Advance

Replenishment.
O/E Enter new purchase orders, sales orders, and packaging orders. Described in Chapter 9,
Entering Orders.
Manage sales and inventory budgets, and generate product and vendor requirements
FCAST reports. Described in a separate document called Demand Forecasting.
Edit or add new vendor, customer, product, kit, or packaging item information. Described
in Chapter 8, Editing Orders and Warehouse Data.
SHIP Export manifest information for ATS-shipped orders to a text file. Described in Picking
a Sales Order on page 128 of Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders.
Edit and print bills of lading and manifests. See About the Orders Module on page 5.
Create returned materials authorizations (RMAs). Described in Entering RMAs on

RMA
page 186 of Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders and Returns.
Edit default Web Dispatch settings. Described in Exiting Web Dispatch on page 48 of
this chapter.
NAVIGATING WEB DISPATCH

The Orders, Receiving, and Reports modules are linked via the following navigational
structure:
O rder Picking Inventory Receiving P.O .

Sum m ary Reports Reports Reports Sum m ary
Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen
Purchase
O rder Details
O rder Details
Screen
Screen
Custom er Packslip Purchase Vendor

Report Report O rder Report Report
Screen Screen Screen Screen
Custom er Product Purchase Vendor

Sales O rder Bin Report
M aintenance Report O rder Edit M aintenance
Edit Screen Screen
License Plate
Report
Screen
O rder Log Product Log Bin Log O rder Log

Sales/work/packaging/purchase and transfer order summary screensDisplay summary

data for all or selected orders in the system, and are described in Using the Orders
Summary Screens on page 14. From these screens, you link to sales/work/packaging
order and purchase order details screens.
Sales/work/packaging/purchase and transfer order details screensDisplay details for

selected orders, and allow you to process them, as described in Using the Order Details
Screens on page 35. From these screens, you can link to the Packslip (Order) and
Purchase Order Reports screens, as well as the Customer, Vendor, and Product Reports
screens.
N AV I G A T I N G W E B D I S P A T C H 7
Packslip (Sales/Work/Packaging/Transfer Sales Order) and Purchase/Transfer Purchase

Order Report screensDisplay detailed information for an individual order and allow you
to process and edit the order, as described in Using Report Screens on page 38. From
these screens, you can also link to edit and log screens for the selected order.
Picking, Receiving, and Inventory Reports screensAllow you to select an individual

customer, packslip (sales/work/packaging/transfer sales order), purchase/transfer purchase
order, vendor, product, and bin location for which to display a detailed report. More
information about these screens is provided in Chapter 7, Generating Reports on
page 201.
Customer, Vendor, Product, Bin, License Plate Reports screensDisplay detailed

information for the selected customer, vendor, product, bin, or license plate, and allow you
to process orders listed for that customer, vendor, product, bin, or license plate. From the
respective screens, you can also link to edit/maintenance screens for the selected customer,
vendor, or product. From the Product and Bin Report screens, you can also link to log
screens for the selected product or bin. More information about these screens in Chapter 7,
Generating Reports on page 201.
Packslip, Purchase Order, Product and Bin Log screensDisplay all log entries for a
selected entity for the previous several months (will vary according to your configuration).
More information on these screens is provided in Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on
page 311.
REFRESHING SCREENS
The Web Dispatch screens do not necessarily automatically refresh as you or warehouse staff
are processing orders. You will need to click the Refresh button regularly to update the
data .
It may take several seconds, or even minutes, for all jobs to complete processing. To ensure
that the displayed data correctly reflects any actions you or other warehouse staff have
performed, keep refreshing the display. When background jobs are reduced to zero, be sure to
refresh again.
CONFIGURING SCREEN DISPLAYS
Most Web Dispatch screens let you configure the type of information you want to display and
the way you want it presented. This is a powerful tool that lets you focus on the data that is
important to you and your warehouse staff.
Any title bar that has the configuration icon can be customized to meet your
requirements. The configuration settings that display are different for each type of screen.
Consider the following example of an orders details screen for waved orders:
N AV I G A T I N G W E B D I S P A T C H 9
> To configure the screen:

1. Click the configure icon . The Form Configuration window dispays.
2. Click the open so link to display the Grid Configuration window for sales orders.
3. Modify the settings as required and click Submit.
FILTERING DATA ON REPORT/DISPLAY SCREENS
You can apply filters to tables or columns displaying the magnifying glass icon. Filters
restrict the data displayed according to a specific criterion.
1 0 CHAPTER 1 U S I N G T H E W E B D I S P A T C H I N T E R F A C E
> To filter information for a table in the window display, click the magnifying glass icon on
the tab:
The Grid Filter window displays.
> To filter information for a specific column in the display, click the magnifying glass icon
for the column:
N AV I G A T I N G W E B D I S P AT C H 1 1
The Column Filter window displays. In the example below, we are using a wildcard to look for
host orders that begin with 1000.
CLEARING FILTERS
Clicking the Clear Filters button clears the filters that were applied to a table or column.
For example, clicking the Clear Filters button clears the filter applied to the Host Orders
column.
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS AND QUICK LAUNCH BAR
The bottom of Web Dispatch screen displays a status bar that shows the following information:
Quick Launch Quick links that were customized by the user. Described in Adding Links to the Quick Launch
bar
Current Web Dispatch User ID.
configuration
tool. Described
in Adding Links
to the Quick Open incidents. Described in Understanding Incidents
Launch Bar. . The number of jobs currently in process.
ADDING LINKS TO THE QUICK LAUNCH BAR
You can create quick links to Web Dispatch reports/display screens by setting up shortcut
buttons on the Quick Launch bar.
> To set up a quick link to a report/display screen:
1. Navigate to the report/screen for which you want to create a quick link.
2. Click the configuration icon on the Status and Quick Launch bar. The Quick Launch
Bar Configuration window displays.
3. Click the fill from current report icon to enter the current report/screen under the
Link heading.
4. Click the Visible checkbox for the link to appear as a button on the Quick Launch bar.
5. In the Shortcut field, enter the text that you would like to display on the button.
6. In the Help Text field, enter the text that you would like to display as hover help.
7. Click Submit. When you refresh the screen, the report can be accessed by clicking the
button that displays on the Quick Launch bar.
USING THE ORDERS SUMMARY SCREENS

When you first link to the Orders or Receiving module from the navigation bar, the following
summary screen is displayed (the example is from the Orders module).
Form Configuration Active Filters Displayed.
Refresh button.
Described in Refreshing Described in
Described in
Screens on page 9 Understanding and Using
Refreshing
Screens on Filters on page 22.
page 9. Clear All Filters button. Incidents assigned to this Orders table. Described
Described in Understanding user. Described in in Understanding the
and Using Filters on Understanding Incidents Orders Table on
page 22. on page 17. page 15.
List of recently viewed pages. Described

in Using the Recent Drop-Down Box on
page 26.
Order display criteria. Table layout criteria. Described in Understanding

Described in and Using Pivots on page 18.
Understanding and Using
Filters on page 22.
Status and Quick Launch bar. Described in Understanding the Status and Quick Launch Bar on page 12.
Note: Depending on your configuration and permissions, your display may contain
different, or fewer, elements.
UNDERSTANDING THE ORDERS TABLE
The orders table is populated as follows:
For the Orders module, it is populated based on information contained in sales, work,
packaging and transfer sales orders that have been downloaded from the host system, or
created in Web Dispatch.
For the Receiving module, it is populated based on information contained in purchase orders
and transfer purchase orders (that have been downloaded from the host system, or created in
Web Dispatch.
The orders table displays all orders in the system, according to the criteria you select from the
various drop-down boxes on the left of the screen.
Currently selected
Pivot headings
horizontal pivot
Orders
statistics
Process steps for

transfer orders Process steps
You can click on an underlined number to drill down to the order details screen (described in
Using the Order Details Screens on page 35) for the selected group of orders.
The orders table consists of the following elements:
Element Explanation
Pivot The pivot selected from the Pivots drop-down list on the left
side of the summary screen. Pivots are described in more
detail in Understanding and Using Pivots on page 18
Pivot heading columns The values available for the selected pivot, according to data
contained in the sales order records. By default, the first
column shows all orders in the system, regardless of any
filters used.
# Orders row Displays the total number of orders per column.
To view details for orders, click on the underlined number
corresponding to the group of orders you want to select, or
click on the number in the All column to view all orders.
# Lines row Displays the total number of lines in all orders per column.
# Allocated Lines row (for Displays the total number of lines that have been allocated in
sales/work orders only) all orders per column.
# Units row Displays the total number of units in all orders per column.
Value Gross row (for sales/ Displays the total dollar value of all orders per column. Only
work orders only) displayed if dollar amounts are available in product records
in the database.
Value Fill row (for sales/ Displays the total dollar value of all fillable lines in all orders
work orders only) per column. Only displayed if dollar amounts are available in
product records in the database.
Estimated Weight row (for Displays the total weight of all orders per column. Only
sales/work orders only) displayed if weights are available in the product records in
the database.
Element Explanation
Process Step rows Display orders according to all process steps currently
applied to orders, per column. An overview of process steps
used in the Orders and Receiving modules is provided in
Understanding Process Steps on page 26.
To view details for orders, click on the underlined number
corresponding to the group of orders you want to select, or
click on the number in the All column to view all orders.
UNDERSTANDING INCIDENTS
Incidents are issues or problems that have been assigned to you by another user. When you
have been assigned an incident, it will display in the Orders and Receiving modules summary
screens as soon as you log on, or click the Refresh button (see Refreshing the Summary
Screen on page 34).
Click the incident number to select an incident

which you want to view or resolve.
Clicking on the incident number links you to the Incidents module, where you can view the
selected incident, and manage incidents that have been assigned to you. Incidents are described
in detail in Chapter 6, Using Incidents.
UNDERSTANDING AND USING PIVOTS
Pivots are ways of displaying orders by controlling the horizontal/column or the vertical/row
organization of records, so that the data is organized according to the selected criterion. For
example, selecting a State horizontal pivot from the drop-down list would display orders in
columns corresponding to the province or state to which the orders are being shipped.
To activate a horizontal pivot, select an item from the following drop-down box:
The vertical pivots can be activated by selecting an item from the following drop-down box:
You configure whether to display horizontal pivots, vertical pivots, both or none, as described
in Configuring the Orders Summary Screens on page 32.
There is a default set of pivots, and the ones displayed on your screen are determined by the
information provided in the orders and the way the A pivot will display if the data represented
by the pivot appears more than once in the orders in the system.
Default pivots available in the Orders module are described in the following table.
Pivot Explanation
Ship Code The shipping code used by your host system to specify shipping
options, such as carrier and service.
Ship Via The carrier specified for the orders.
Date Created The date the orders were downloaded or created in RADIO
BEACON WMS.
Handle A name associated with a group of orders to help identify them.
Ship Province The province or state to which the orders are to be delivered.
Client Name The owner of the products for the orders (used only in multi-
company or 3PL implementations).
Customer Number The number of the customer for the orders
Back Order Number The back order numbers applied by the host system or RADIO
BEACON WMS for the orders.
Truck Route The truck route to be used for the orders.
Priority The priority level assigned to the orders, from 0 to 9, where 0 is
the lowest priority, and 9 is the highest.
Fill Rate The percentage of lines that must be available for picking before
the orders can be released.
Cost Centre The customers division or department being billed for the orders.
Batch Reference The batch reference number assigned by the host system to the
orders.
Date Ordered The date the orders were created in the host system. If this
information is not available, the date ordered defaults to the Date
Created.
Date Required The date the orders are required to ship.
Date Cancelled The date the orders are to be cancelled if they have not yet been
shipped.
Number of Lines The number of lines in the orders.
Number of Units The number of units in the orders.
Instruction1 The first special instruction defined for the orders.
Pivot Explanation
Wave The wave numbers assigned by RADIO BEACON WMS when the
orders were waved.
Ship Complete A yes/no value indicating whether the orders must be shipped
complete or not.
Ship Consolidated A yes/no value indicating whether the orders must be
consolidated with other orders or not.
Pickup Number The shipment number applied to the orders.
Store Number The customers store numbers.
User ID The user IDs of the last pickers to pick the orders.
Error Message Error messages that were generated for the orders, if any.
Date Modified The date the orders last had an action applied to them, such as
allocating, waving etc.
Ship Country The country to which the orders are to be shipped.
End-of-Line The end-of-line configuration applied to the orders.
Packlane The number of the laser printer on which the packslips for the
orders are printed.
Assembly A yes/no value indicating whether the orders are work orders or
not.
Process Step The process step of the orders.
Special1 The first special instruction in the orders.
Order Group The replenishment group assigned to the orders.
OK to Back Order A yes/no value indicating whether items that are shipped short
may be back ordered.
Pack & Hold Orders that have been marked as PACK & HOLD during waving.
PO Type The customers PO type for the orders.
Extra1 - Extra5 Extra information or instructions defined for the orders.
T48 The half-hour increments (of 48 in each day) in which the orders
were downloaded.
Custom Label Type The type of custom picking/shipping label required for the orders.
Default pivots available in the Receiving module are described in the following table.
Default Explanation
Pivots
Date Created The date the orders were downloaded or created in RADIO BEACON WMS.
Vendor Number The name of the vendor for the orders.
Received By The user IDs of the most recent warehouse receivers.
Received On The date the orders were received.
Buyer The users who created the orders initially.
Due Date The date the orders are due to arrive in the warehouse.
Vendor Name The name of the vendor.
Number of The number of lines in the orders.
Lines
Client Name The owner of the products for the orders (used only in multi-company or
3PL implementations).
Back Order The back order numbers applied by the host system or RADIO BEACON
WMS for the orders.
Date Modified The date the orders last had an action applied to them, such as closing,
deleting etc.
Instruction1 The first special instruction defined for the orders.
Extra1 - Extra3 Extra information or instructions defined for the orders.
Handle A name associated with a group of orders to help identify them.
Process Step The process step of the orders.
UNDERSTANDING AND USING FILTERS
The order summary screen allows you to filter the data displayed in the orders table, by the
using following types of filters:
filter (custom)
alert (custom)
product
warehouse
handle
client name
location
Each of these is described in the sections following.
Note that you can combine multiple filters to restrict your displayed data set even more.
In addition, you can filter data by configuring screen as described in Refreshing Screens on
page 9.
Database query statement for all active filters are displayed in the filter status bar.
To clear all the active filters, including alerts, and re-display all orders in the system, click the
Clear All Active Filters button .
Filter (Custom)
A filter is a way of filtering (i.e., restricting) the display of orders according to a predefined
criterion, so that only orders that meet that criterion are displayed. Filters must be configured
for your system, and are determined by the information provided in the orders. For example, in
the figure below, selecting a filter of UPS Orders will display only orders that are to be
shipped by UPS.
A default of All Orders is usually used, unless otherwise configured. To activate a filter,
select an item from the drop-down box.
Alert (Custom)
An alert, like a filter, is a way of filtering the display of orders in according to a predefined
criterion, so that only orders that meet that criterion are displayed. Alerts must be configured
for your system, and are determined by the information contained the orders. The difference
from filters is that alerts are intended to be used for urgent criteria, such as a priority customer,
or a priority order. They only appear if there are orders in the system for that alert. The total
number of orders for each alert is shown to the left of that alert.
For example, in the figure below, selecting an alert of Hot Picks or Sweets Orders will
only show records that have been marked by the host system as being hot picks, or orders for
the customer Sweet Thoughts.
Total number of open

orders for this alert.
To activate an alert, simply click on the desired alert. Note, however, that alerts are much more
process-intensive than filters, and therefore should not be overused.
Product
To display only orders with a particular product on them, you can use the Product filter. In the
example below, only orders with product number LF211 will be displayed.
To activate a product filter, enter the product number in the field, and click anywhere outside
the field, or press the Tab key.
Warehouse
To display only orders that belong to a particular warehouse, you can use the Warehouse filter.
The warehouse is a one- or two-digit code that identifies a physical or logical site from which
you may allocate and pick products.
To activate a warehouse filter, enter the warehouse number in the field, and click anywhere
outside the field, or press the Tab key.
Tip: You can also set the default warehouse for your own instance of Web Dispatch. For
more information, see Editing Default Settings on page 46.
Client Name
If your warehouse is a multi-company or third-party logistics operation, you will have an

additional filter, for client name. Depending on the configuration of your user ID, you may or
3PL may not be able to use this filter. If your user ID is configured to restrict you to viewing orders
only for a single client, you will not be able to edit the field.
If your user ID is configured to allow you to view orders for all clients, to activate a client filter
to display only the orders for a specific client, enter the client name (or number) in the field,
and click anywhere outside the field, or press the Tab key.
Location
If your system supports multiple locations, you will have an additional filter, for locations.
Depending on the configuration of your user ID, you may or may not be able to use this filter.
LOC If your user ID is configured to restrict you to viewing orders only for a single location, you
will not be able to edit the field.
If your user ID is configured to allow you to view orders for all locations, to activate a location
filter to display only the orders for a specific location, enter the location name (or number) in
the field, and click anywhere outside the field, or press the Tab key.
UNDERSTANDING AND USING HANDLES
A handle is a name, consisting of any alphanumeric text, that is used to identify an order or
group of orders. A handle may be specified in the downloaded orders themselves, or you may
add a handle to an order or group of orders in Web Dispatch when you perform any action on
them, such as allocating or waving. Handles help you follow orders throughout processing in
the warehouse, and are especially useful when there are a large number of orders in the system
and it is difficult to distinguish clearly between them.
The Handle field on the order summary screen lets you enter a handle so that only orders to
which you have applied that handle are displayed. For example, in the following figure, the
handle unallocaug22 was applied to a group of orders to indicate that they had to be rewaved
because of an earlier problem. Entering unallocaug22 in the Handle field here will
display only those orders.
To display orders by handle, enter a previously-defined handle, and click anywhere outside the
field, or press the Tab key.
USING THE RECENT DROP-DOWN BOX
The Recent drop-down box in both Orders and Receiving summary screens lists the most
recently accessed sales order, purchase order, customer, vendor, and product report.
To link directly to the report you want to view, select the packslip, PO, customer, vendor, or
product number from the list.
UNDERSTANDING PROCESS STEPS
The process steps for sales, work, packaging and purchase orders are summarized in the tables
below.
Process Steps For Sales Orders
Most of these process steps are discussed in detail in Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders.
Process steps with the TRANS prefix apply to transfer sales orders. The warehouse transfer
functionality uses transfer sales orders to move products out of the original warehouse to a
LOC
transit site. For the most part, transfer sales orders are processed identically to regular sales
orders from the perspective of the dispatcher and the warehouse staff. We recommend that you
read Warehouse/Site Transfer on page 83 of the Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS manual
to understand how transfer sales orders are used as part of the warehouse transfer function.
Process Step Explanation

UNALLOCATED The order has not yet been allocated. If your system is
configured to automatically allocate sales orders on
TRANS UNALLOCATED
download, this status will be skipped.
HELD SHORT Some or all lines in the order require stock that is not
available, and the order was configured to be held until new
TRANS HELD SHORT
stock is received.

HELD FOR Some or all lines in the order require stock that is not
REPLENISHMENT available in pickable bins, and the order was configured to be
held until stock in pick bins is replenished.
TRANS HELD FOR
REPLENISHMENT
HELD FORMAT There is inventory in the warehouse to fill this order, but it
cannot be allocated to the order because of an
TRANS HELD FORMAT
incompatibility with the product required for the order.
Examples of wrong formats are wrong packsizes, wrong
attribute data, or storage in zones or warehouses that are
excluded from allocation or replenishment.
WAIT PRE-RATE Stock has been allocated to the order and the order is waiting
to be rated by an external shipping system. This status is only
TRANS WAIT PRE-RATE
displayed if you are using an integrated shipping system, and
it is configured for pre-rating at allocation. It often indicates
a problem in pre-rating.
WAITING - SWOG The order has been fully allocated, but it cannot be released
for picking because it is waiting for other orders for the same
TRANS WAITING - SWOG
customer and shipping address to be allocated.
PACK & HOLD Some or all lines in the order require stock that is not
available, but the allocated lines may be picked immediately.
TRANS PACK & HOLD
You must have selected this option when you waved an
order.
LOCKED A special status that is applied only to packslips from which
a Delivery(ies) has been created and which has remaining
items on the it. Once processing of the Deliveries begins, the
original packslip will be LOCKED, so no further processing
is allowed. The remaining items on the packslip are reported
to the host as unfulfilled.
READY TO WAVE The order has been fully allocated and it is ready to be
released to the warehouse floor.
TRANS READY TO WAVE
WAVED The order has been assigned to a picking wave and it is ready
to be picked.
TRANS WAVED

BEING PICKED The order has been opened by a picker and stock is being
picked.
TRANS BEING PICKED
BEING REPACKED The order has been picked, but it is being repacked.
TRANS BEING REPACKED
READY TO SHIP The order has been completely picked and is ready to be
processed by shipping functions. This status is only
TRANS READY TO SHIP
displayed if your system is configured for automatic
background shipping, and an end-of-line configuration is
applied to the order that requires it to be processed in the
RADIO BEACON WMS shipping functions.
RECORD SHIPMENT The order has been completely picked and is being processed
with the Carton Shipping or Record Shipment shipping
TRANS RECORD
functions. This status is only displayed if an end-of-line
SHIPMENT
configuration is applied to the order that requires it to be
processed in the RADIO BEACON WMS shipping functions.
RATING The order has been completely picked and is being processed
by an external shipping system. This status is only displayed
TRANS RATING
if an end-of-line configuration is applied to the order that
requires it to be processed and rated by a shipping system.
WAITING BOL# The order has been completely picked and has undergone all
shipping processes, but is waiting for the dispatcher to assign
TRANS WAITING BOL#
a bill of lading number to it. This status is only displayed if
an end-of-line configuration is applied to the order that
requires it to be assigned a bill of lading number.
EXTERNAL The order has been completely picked and has undergone all
shipping processes, but is waiting for an external manual
TRANS EXTERNAL
process to be performed before it can go out the door. This
status is only displayed if an end-of-line configuration is
applied to the order that requires an external process to be
executed.
Note: This status is also displayed if an order has been nuked
and was flagged to be held. For more information, see
Cancelling or Expediting Sales Orders on page 120.

SUSPENDED The order has been suspended by the dispatcher, or by a
problem during allocation. An error message normally
TRANS SUSPENDED
appears indicating the nature of the problem for this status.
READY TO UPLOAD The order has been shipped, and the pick confirmation is
ready to be uploaded to the host system. Normally, your
TRANS READY TO
system will be configured to automatically upload completed
UPLOAD
sales orders, and this status will not be displayed.
SHIPPED AND UPLOADED The order has been shipped, and the pick confirmation (or
stock move transaction in the case of transfer sales orders)
TRANS SHIPPED AND
has been uploaded to the host system. You can only view
UPLOADED
orders in this status from the Reports module. For
information, see Uploaded Shipments Report on page 218.
Note: Sales orders that are created by the Sales Order By Walking Around function on the
handheld (for information, see Entering Sales Orders in Using RADIO BEACON
Handheld Functions) are immediately placed into RATING, WAITING BOL,
EXTERNAL or READY TO UPLOAD/SHIPPED AND UPLOADED status,
depending on your configuration.
Process Steps For Work Orders

KIT
Most of these process steps are discussed in detail in Chapter 3, Processing Assembly
Orders.
ASSEMBLY - The order has not yet been allocated. If your system is configured
UNALLOCATED to automatically allocate work orders on download, this status
will be skipped.
ASSEMBLY-SHORT Some or all lines in the kit require stock that is not available.
ASSEMBLY-WAIT The order has been fully allocated, and is ready for components
REPLEN to be moved from storage bins into a work area, for assembly.
ASSEMBLY-READY Component products have been let down from overstock and
moved into the work area. The kits are ready to be assembled.

ASSEMBLY-BEING Some of the kits have been built and recorded on the handheld.
BUILT
ASSEMBLY- All of the kits in the order have been assembled, but the kitter has
COMPLETE not yet finished the order to release it for upload.
SHIPPED AND The order has been completed, and the adjustments uploaded to
UPLOADED the host system. You can only view orders in this status from the
Reports module. See Uploaded Shipments Report on page 218.
PACK Process Steps For Packaging Orders

Most of these process steps are discussed in detail in Chapter 4, Processing Packaging
Orders.
PKG - READY TO The order was generated from the Packaging Report, and labels
PRINT need to be printed from the handheld.
PKG - WAITING The order is waiting for inventory to be let down from overstock
LETDOWN and moved to the work area for packaging.
PKG - BEING BUILT The required inventory has been let down from overstock and
moved into the work area. The inventory is ready to be
packaged, or the packaging process may be under way.
SHIPPED AND The order has been packaged, and the adjustments uploaded to
UPLOADED the host system. You can only view orders in this status from the
Reports module.See Packslip Report on page 214.
Process Steps For Purchase Orders

Most of these process steps are discussed in detail in Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders
and Returns.
Process steps with the TRANS prefix apply to transfer purchase orders used to move
products into the destination warehouse when transferring products from one warehouse site to
LOC
another, via a transit site. For the most part, transfer purchase orders are processed identically
to regular purchase orders from the perspective of the dispatcher and the warehouse staff. We
recommend you read Warehouse/Site Transfer on page 83 of the Overview of RADIO
BEACON WMS manual to understand how transfer purchase orders are used as part of the
warehouse transfer function.

REQUISITION Purchase orders created via a requisition in Web Dispatch. See
Demand Forecasting document.
APPROVED The purchase order was created in Web Dispatch and has not
yet been released to the warehouse floor for receiving. This
O/E status is only displayed if your system is configured to require
PO release.
This process step is not applicable to transfer purchase orders
since only transfer sales orders are created in Web Dispatch.
LOC Transfer purchase orders are created automatically by RADIO
BEACON WMS when a transfer sales order is uploaded, or
manually on the handheld.
NOT RECEIVED The purchase order is waiting for product to be received in the
warehouse.
TRANS NOT RECEIVED
BEING RECEIVED A warehouse receiver has opened the purchase order, or has
opened a non-P.O. receipt, and is beginning to receive stock.
TRANS BEING
RECEIVED
READY TO UPLOAD A warehouse receiver has closed the purchase order or non-
P.O. receipt and the receipt confirmation or miscellaneous
TRANSREADY TO
adjustment is ready to be uploaded to the host system.
UPLOAD
Normally, your system will be configured to automatically
upload completed purchase orders, and this status will not be
displayed.
UPLOADED The order has been received, and the receipt confirmation
uploaded to the host system. You can only view orders in this
TRANS UPLOADED
status from the Reports module. For information, see
Purchase Order Report on page 226.
CONFIGURING THE ORDERS SUMMARY SCREENS
You can customize the display of the Orders and/or Receiving summary screens to suit your
needs.
> To configure the Orders or Receiving summary screen:
1. Click the configuration icon on the title bar. The Form Configuration window
displays.
2. Click the link under the controlid heading, or click the link under the header heading.
Either way, the Pivot Grid Configuration window displays.
You can modify the configuration of the Orders and/or Receiving summary screens as follows:
Enable/disable the display of horizontal and/or vertical pivots. If enabled, specify the
vertical/horizontal pivots that should be by default. Described in Understanding and
Using Pivots on page 18.
Enable/Disable the display of alerts, filter selection boxes, and incidents. Described in
Alert (Custom) on page 23, Filter (Custom) on page 23, and Understanding
Incidents on page 17.
Specify default values that should display for the product and warehouse filters, and for
handles. Described in Product on page 24, Warehouse on page 24, and
Understanding and Using Handles on page 25.
Enable/disable selects that allow the Web Dispatch user to filter orders by the summary
table column and/or row. Described in Using Pivot Selection below.
Using Pivot Selection
The Horizontal and Vertical Pivot Selections options in the Form Configuration window let
you display horizontal and vertical selects. This is another method of filtering orders, this time
using buttons that appear in pivot columns and rows. These buttons allow the Web Dispatch
user to restrict the display of orders to only those meeting the criterion represented by a
particular summary table column or row.
REFRESHING THE SUMMARY SCREEN
The order summary screen does not automatically refresh as you or warehouse staff are
processing orders. You will need to click the Refresh button regularly to update the data .
When you perform an action such as allocating or waving on an order or group of orders,
regardless of the screen you use to perform the action, the Order Summary screen always re-
appears automatically, displaying number of background jobs in the status bar:
It may take several seconds, or even minutes, for all jobs to complete processing. To ensure
that the data displayed correctly reflects any actions you or other warehouse staff have
performed, keep refreshing the display. When background jobs are reduced to zero, be sure to
refresh again.
LINKING TO THE ORDER DETAILS SCREENS
To view additional details for groups of orders, in the Orders or Receiving modules, from the
orders summary screen, click on any underlined number in either the # Orders or Process
Step rows.
Click to display
these orders.
The details screen for the selected orders is displayed, as described in Using the Order Details
Screens on page 35.
USING THE ORDER DETAILS SCREENS
When you click on a number of orders in the Orders or Receiving summary screens, you link to
the order details screen, as illustrated below:
Selection check boxes Detail headings
Pop-up menu
The Orders and Receiving details screens contain the following elements:
Element Explanation Described in...

Selection check Click a checkbox to select an order for Selecting and Processing
boxes processing. Orders on page 40.
Note: Selection checkboxes also appear in
various reports screens to allow you to
select orders and process them.

Detail headings Click on a heading to sort orders in the
sequence of the selected heading. For
example, click on the Required Date
heading to sort orders by date required.
The headings displayed depend on the
fields that are populated in the orders.
Pop-up menu Serves two purposes: to select and deselect Selecting and Processing
checkboxes next to orders; and to perform Orders on page 40.
actions on selected orders.
LINKING TO REPORTS SCREENS
From the details screens, you can link to detailed reports screens for orders, vendors and
customers.
Viewing Order Details
To view additional details for an order, in the Orders or Receiving modules respectively, from
the order details screen, click on an underlined number under the Packslip or PO columns.
Click here to view this

order.
The Report screen for the selected order is displayed, as described in Using Report Screens
on page 38.
Viewing Customer Details
To view additional details for a customer, in the Orders module, from the order details screen,
click on an underlined number under the Customer Number column.
Click here to view information for

this customer.
The Customer Report screen for the selected customer is displayed, as described in Customer
Report on page 213.
Viewing Vendor Details
To view additional details for a vendor, in the in the Receiving module, from the order details
screen module, click on an underlined number under the VENDOR NUMBER column.
Click here to view information for
this vendor.
The Vendor Report screen for the selected vendor is displayed, as described in Vendor
Report on page 222.
USING REPORT SCREENS
When you click on an order number in the sales/work or purchase orders details screens, you
link to the Packslip (sales/work/packaging order) or Purchase Order Report screens.
Log button
Edit button
General order
information
Detailed order information
Line
informatio
Pop-up menu
Tip: You can also access order report screens from the Reports module. For more
information, see General Procedures for Generating Reports on page 209 of
Chapter 7, Generating Reports.
Packslip (sales order) and Purchase Order Report screens contain the following elements:

Edit button Click to edit the order. Editing Sales, Work, Packaging
and Transfer Sales Orders on
(only available if you have
page 260 and Editing Purchase
the appropriate
Order Information on page 264.
permissions)
SHIP BOL button (Packslip Click to create a bill of Generating Bills of Lading and
Report screens only) lading for the order. Manifests on page 125.
Log button Click to display the log Chapter 11, Troubleshooting
report for the order. on page 311.
(only available if you have
the appropriate
permissions)
General order information Displays general
information, such as
customer/vendor data,
status, and so on.
Line details Show the status of product, Understanding Sales Order
and bins from which the Line Statuses on page 57 and
product has been allocated. Understanding the Purchase
You can also edit order Order Report Screen on
lines by clicking the Edit page 173.
link under the Edit heading
Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/
for the line, if you have the
Packaging Order Line Details
appropriate permissions.
on page 262 and Editing or
Deleting Purchase Order Line
Details on page 265.
Detailed order information Displays special Understanding Process Flags
instructions, statistics, on page 59.
handling codes.

Pop-up menu Performs actions on the Selecting and Processing
current order. Orders on page 40.
Shipping/carton Displays carton serial Understanding Shipping

information (Packslip numbers, track-trace Statuses on page 63.
Report screens only) numbers, statuses, and
statistics.
Packslip and Purchase Order Report screens also allow you to do the following:
Access report screens for vendors, customers, products, from which you can link to other
report screens and vendor, customer, and product edit screens. For more information, see
Chapter 7, Generating Reports on page 201, and Chapter 8, Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data on page 259.
Open your e-mail client program with a pre-addressed e-mail to a customer or vendor
contact person.
SELECTING AND PROCESSING ORDERS

The following sections provide general procedures for selecting individual orders, or groups of
orders, and process them:
Selecting Orders on page 41.
Processing Orders from Details Screens on page 41.
Processing Orders from Report Screens on page 42.
General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44.
SELECTING ORDERS
To process orders in the Details screens in the Orders and Receiving modules, you must select
an order or groups of orders to which you will apply an action. By default, when you access the
details screens, all orders are selected. This means that any actions you apply to them, by right-
clicking anywhere in the screen and invoking the pop-up menu, will apply to all orders. To
deselect or reselect specific orders, use the following procedures.
> To select/deselect an order:
Click a check box next to an order to enable or disable it.
> To select/deselect all orders:
Right-click anywhere on the details screen, and from the pop-up menu that appears, choose
On/Off to toggle between enabling or disabling all check boxes.
> To select/deselect a contiguous group of orders:
1. Click a check box next to the first order of the group to enable or disable it.
2. Click a check box next to the last order of the group to enable or disable it.
3. Right-click anywhere on the details screen, and from the pop-up menu that appears,
choose Between. All orders between the first and last are selected/deselected.
PROCESSING ORDERS FROM DETAILS SCREENS
To process orders once you have selected them, you right-click anywhere on the details screen
to invoke the pop-up menu, and select an action. An overview of pop-up menu actions is
provided in Using Pop-Up Menu Actions on page 42.
Note: The actual set of actions available on your pop-up menus will depend on the
permissions configured for your user ID.
S E L E C T I N G A N D P R O C E SS I N G O R D E R S 4 1
PROCESSING ORDERS FROM REPORT SCREENS
You can process a single order from a Packslip or Purchase Order Report screen by right-
clicking anywhere on the screen to invoke the pop-up menu, and selecting an action. The
Customer, Bin, and Product reports also allow you to select orders as in the order details
screens (see above), and apply an action to the selected group of orders, as in the following
example (taken from a Product Report screen):
USING POP-UP MENU ACTIONS
The following table summarizes the functions of the Orders module pop-up menu actions, the
types of orders to which the actions apply, and the sections of this manual in which they are
described in more detail.
Action Use to... Described in...

Allocate Allocate and re-allocate stock to Allocating and Re-allocating Sales
sales, work and transfer sales Orders on page 67.
orders, and re-allocate stock to
Allocating and Re-allocating Work
packaging orders.
Orders on page 147.
Unallocate Unallocate and free up stock from Unallocating Sales Orders on
allocated sales, work, transfer page 88.
sales, or packaging orders.
Unallocating Work Orders on
page 155.
Wave Release allocated sales and Waving and Re-waving Orders on
transfer sales orders for picking. page 99.

Unwave Pull waved sales or transfer sales Unwaving Orders on page 111.
orders back from picking.
Ship Apply shipping options to sales Understanding and Modifying
orders or transfer sales, or Shipping Options on page 90.
perform handheld shipping
Pre-rating Orders on page 98.
functions in Web Dispatch.
Performing Shipping Actions on
page 112.
Nuke Cancel or expedite sales or Cancelling or Expediting Sales
transfer sales orders, or cancel Orders on page 120.
work or packaging orders.
Cancelling Work Orders on
page 156.
Suspend Remove sales or transfer sales Suspending Orders on page 118.
orders from processing.
Unsuspend Return suspended sales or Unsuspending Orders on page 119.
transfer sales orders to normal
processing.
Clone Picking Process identical sales orders Using Clone Picking on page 135
quickly, based on the picking and
packing process used on the
original master sales order.
Unclone Cancels clone picking. Cancelling Clone Picking on
page 137
Test Order Create a snapshot of your current Creating a Test Order Database on
Database sales, work, and packaging order page 316.
data, for support purposes.
The following table summarizes the functions of the Receiving module pop-up menu actions,
and the sections of this manual in which they are described in more detail.

Release Order Release purchase orders created Releasing Purchase Orders on
in Web Dispatch for receiving. page 177.
O/E This action is only available if
your system is configured to
require PO release
Delete PO Cancel or expedite purchase or Cancelling or Expediting Purchase
transfer purchase orders. Orders on page 179.
Complete PO Complete and close received Closing Purchase Orders on
purchase or transfer purchase page 178.
orders.
Test PO Create a snapshot of your current Creating a Test Order Database on
Database purchase order data, for support page 316.
purposes.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR PROCESSING ORDERS
> To process orders:
1. Select an order or group of orders to be processed, by doing one of the following:
From the Orders or Receiving details screens, select the desired order or orders (for
procedures, see Selecting Orders on page 41).
Open the Packslip (sales/work/packaging order) Report or Purchase Order Report

screen for the desired order.
From another report screen, such as the Customer Report, which shows open orders
for a given customer, the Product Report, which shows open orders for a given
product, and the Bin Detail Report, which shows open orders for a given pick bin,
select the desired order or orders (for procedures, see Selecting Orders on page 41).
2. Right-click anywhere on the screen, and from the pop-up menu, select the action you want
to perform. An overview of each action is provided in Using Pop-Up Menu Actions on
page 42. The Settings window for the selected action is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify settings for this order or group of orders. Settings for each action are
described throughout Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders, Chapter 3, Processing
Assembly Orders, and Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders and Returns.
4. Optionally, in the Handle field, enter an identifier for the order or group of orders being
processed.
Tip: It is a good practice to use a common naming convention, including your initials, the
date, and the reason for the handle. For example, a handle you might apply to a group
of orders that you are allocating would be KMJune6Alloc1.
5. When done, click Submit (or click Close to cancel). The orders summary screen is
automatically displayed, with the number of background jobs (representing the number of
orders being processed) in the status bar.
Click the Refresh button as many times as necessary to completely update the order display.
When all orders have been processed, they should be updated with the appropriate settings and/
or statuses, as described throughout Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders, Chapter 3,
Processing Assembly Orders, Chapter 4, Processing Packaging Orders, and Chapter 5,
Processing Purchase Orders and Returns.
EDITING DEFAULT SETTINGS

The options for the Allocate, Wave, Unwave, Nuke, Delete PO, and Advance Replenishment
actions in the Orders, Receiving, and Reports modules are populated with defaults defined in
your RADIO BEACON WMS configuration. These options are explained in the following
sections of this manual, which discuss how to edit these settings on-the-fly for specific orders:
Understanding and Modifying Sales Order Allocation Options on page 70.
Understanding and Modifying Work Order Replenishment Options on page 149.
Understanding and Modifying Wave Options on page 101.
Understanding and Modifying the Unwave Option on page 112.
Understanding and Modifying Sales Order Nuke Options on page 121.
Understanding and Modifying Work Order Nuke Options on page 157
Understanding and Modifying Delete Options on page 180.
Understanding and Modifying Advance Replenishment Options on page 307
However, if your system is not multi-company/client, you can also edit the default settings for
your user ID only, so that the settings you choose always appear by default whenever you log
on to Web Dispatch.
> To edit default action settings:
1. Go to the options you want to set as described in the cross-references listed above. For
example, here we will set allocation options.
2. Select or enter the desired values from the drop-down lists or text fields. For more
information on each option, see the cross-references listed above.
3. When done, click Save as Default. The defaults you have specified are now displayed on
as the defaults whenever this screen is accessed.
In addition, you can set the default warehouse for your instance of Web Dispatch, so only
orders for that warehouse are ever displayed.
Note: The facility for editing default Web Dispatch settings for an individual user is not
3PL available if you are using the 3PL edition of RADIO BEACON.
E D I T I N G D E F A U L T S E T T I N G S 4 7
EXITING WEB DISPATCH

When you are finished a Web Dispatch session, you should log off.
> To log off Web Dispatch:
1. From the navigation bar, click Exit. The logon screen is displayed.
2. Optionally, close your Internet Explorer window.
2 PROCESSING SALES ORDERS
ABOUT PROCESSING SALES ORDERS

You process sales orders by applying actions to them. These actions take orders through the
processing cycle described in Understanding RADIO BEACON WMS Processes in the
manual Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS. You may wish to review that chapter before
continuing.
You process transfer sales orders in the same way as regular sales orders, by applying the same
actions. For the most part, transfer sales orders are processed identically to regular sales orders
from the perspective of the dispatcher and the warehouse staff. The warehouse/site transfer
LOC functionality is described in Warehouse/Site Transfer in the Overview of RADIO BEACON
WMS manual.
Note: Unless otherwise indicated, all processing, statuses and actions described in this
LOC
chapter apply to transfer sales orders in the same way as regular sales orders.
The following sections provide conceptual background information on working with sales
orders:
Understanding Sales Order Actions and Statuses on page 50.
Understanding the Packslip Report Screen on page 56.
Understanding Types of Sales Orders on page 65.
Additional Sales Order Processing Functions on page 67.
4 9
U SI N G R AD I O B E A C O N W E B D I S P A T C H
UNDERSTANDING SALES ORDER ACTIONS AND STATUSES
The actions that appear on the pop-up menu in the Orders details and Packslip, Customer, Bin
Detail, and Product report screens are used to process orders and move them through the
warehouse cycle:
Allocate
Unallocate
Reallocate Line (available from the Product Report screen only)
Release (available from the Exception Report screen only)
Ship
Wave
Unwave
Suspend
Unsuspend
Clone Picking
Unclone
Nuke
Note: The actions that are actually available to you will depend on your permissions.
5 0 CHAPTER 2 P R O C E SS I N G S AL E S O R D E R S
The following sections provide an overview of the actions that you can apply to sales orders,
the stage in the processing cycle at which you normally perform them, and the sections in this
chapter in which they are described. For an overview of sales order process steps, see
Understanding Process Steps on page 26.
Process steps with the TRANS prefix apply to transfer sales orders that are used to move
products out of the original warehouse when transferring products from one warehouse site to
LOC
another, via a transit site. For the most part, transfer sales orders are processed identically to
regular sales orders from the perspective of the dispatcher and the warehouse staff.
ABOUT THE ALLOCATE ACTION
You use the Allocate action to do the following:
Use to... Apply to orders in this Described in...

status...
Allocate stock to sales orders that (TRANS) UNALLOCATED Allocating and Re-
have not yet been allocated. allocating Sales Orders
on page 67.
Re-allocate orders that were not (TRANS) HELD FOR Allocating and Re-
allocated successfully, or have REPLENISHMENT allocating Sales Orders
been only partially allocated. (TRANS) HELD SHORT on page 67.
(TRANS) HELD FORMAT
(TRANS) WAIT PRE-RATE
A B O U T P R O C E SS I N G S AL E S O R D E R S 5 1
ABOUT THE UNALLOCATE ACTION
You use the Unallocate action to do the following:

status...
Unallocate previously (TRANS) READY TO WAVE Unallocating Sales
allocated sales or work orders (TRANS) HELD FOR Orders on page 88.
and free up reserved stock. REPLENISHMENT
(TRANS) HELD SHORT
(TRANS) HELD FORMAT
(TRANS) WAIT PRE-RATE
(TRANS) WAITING - SWOG
ABOUT THE REALLOCATE LINE ACTION
You can use the Reallocate Line action to do the following:

status...
Re-allocate one product on a (TRANS) READY TO WAVE, Allocating and Re-
single or multiple orders. (TRANS) HELD FOR allocating Sales Orders
REPLENISHMENT, on page 67.
(TRANS) HELD SHORT
(TRANS) HELD FORMAT
ABOUT THE RELEASE ACTION
The Release action, available only from the Exception Report, is used to do the following:
Use to... Apply to orders in Described in...

this status...
Release orders without missing HELD SHORT Releasing Orders with
products, to be shipped short. HELD FORMAT Held Lines on page 85
ABOUT THE SHIP ACTION

SHIP
You use the Ship action to do the following:

status...
Modify various shipping any, but preferably Understanding and
options for orders. (TRANS) READY TO WAVE Modifying Shipping
Options on page 90.
Pre-rate orders by an (TRANS) READY TO WAVE Pre-rating Orders on
integrated shipping system. page 98.
Bypass order pre-rating by an (TRANS) WAIT PRE-RATE Handling Wait Pre-Rate
integrated shipping system. Orders on page 87.
Release orders that are held (TRANS) WAITING - SWOG Handling Waiting -
to be shipped with other SWOG Orders on
goods. page 87.
Bypass or perform order (TRANS) BEING PICKED, Performing Shipping
shipping functions. (TRANS) BEING REPACKED, Actions on page 112.
(TRANS) READY TO SHIP,
(TRANS) RATING
ABOUT THE WAVE ACTION
You use the Wave action to do the following:

status...
Release allocated orders to the (TRANS) READY TO Waving and Re-waving
warehouse floor, making them WAVE Orders on page 99.
available to pickers.
Release partially allocated orders (TRANS)HELD SHORT/ Packing and Holding
to the floor to be picked and then FOR REPLENISHMENT Orders on page 109.
held.
Consolidate multiple orders into a (TRANS) READY TO Consolidating Orders
single order. WAVE on page 109.
ABOUT THE UNWAVE ACTION
You use the Unwave action to do the following:

status...
Pull an order back from the (TRANS)WAVED, Unwaving Orders on
warehouse floor. (TRANS) BEING PICKED, page 111.
(TRANS)PACK & HOLD
ABOUT THE SUSPEND ACTION
You use the Suspend action to do the following:

this status...
Hold a released order from further any Suspending Orders on
processing until a manual procedure page 118.
has been performed.
ABOUT THE UNSUSPEND ACTION
You use the Unsuspend action to do the following:

this status...
Place a suspended order back into the (TRANS) SUSPENDED Unsuspending Orders
main pool of warehouse orders to be on page 119.
processed as usual.
ABOUT THE NUKE ACTION
You use the Nuke action to do the following:

this status...
Cancel an order and, optionally, delete any Cancelling or
it from RADIO BEACON WMS. Expediting Sales
Orders on page 120.
Expedite an order by bypassing any Cancelling or
normal processing steps. Expediting Sales
Orders on page 120.
ABOUT THE CLONE PICKING ACTION
You use the Clone Picking action to do the following:

this status...
Process identical sales orders quickly, (TRANS) READY TO Using Clone Picking
based on the picking and packing WAVE on page 135.
process used on the original master
sales order.
ABOUT THE UNCLONE ACTION
You use the Unclone action to do the following:

status...
Reverse clone picked sales Previously cloned orders in any Cancelling Clone
orders and return them to status indicating that an order is Picking on page 137.
READY TO WAVE status. completely picked, but not yet
uploaded to the host.
(TRANS) READY TO SHIP,
(TRANS) READY TO
UPLOAD,
(TRANS) RATING
(TRANS) EXTENDED
UNDERSTANDING THE PACKSLIP REPORT SCREEN
The Packslip Report screen tells you all the details about an order, and is helpful for monitoring
and troubleshooting a sales order throughout all stages of the warehouse cycle, from initial
allocation, to shipping and upload to the host system.
The following sections describe portions of the report screen that you can use to monitor an
orders progress:
Understanding Sales Order Line Statuses on page 57.
Understanding Process Flags on page 59.
Understanding Shipping Statuses on page 63.
UNDERSTANDING SALES ORDER LINE STATUSES
In addition to order statuses, the lines on sales orders are also marked with statuses, which are
displayed on Packslip Report screens. It may be helpful for troubleshooting purposes to view
the line results, so that you can see the product(s) that may be holding up an order. In the
example below, the order has been held short because of the products ordered in the first two
lines.
Line number Product ordered for that Line status

line
Line statuses are marked and color-coded as follows:
Status Indicator Color Explanation

Not Alloc Grey The line has not been allocated.
Bin label(s) Green The line has been allocated, from the pick bins indicated.
Bin label(s) Blue Product for this line is not available in pick bins, but is
available in the overstock bins indicated. The line requires
that product be replenished to pick bins.
Short Red Product for this line is not available anywhere in the
warehouse. The line requires that product be received and
replenished to pick bins.
Status Indicator Color Explanation

Wrong Format Red Product for this line is available in the warehouse, but
cannot be allocated to this order due to an incompatibility.
Additional information regarding the cause of the
problem is also indicated (for more information, see
Handling Held Format Orders on page 83).
Batch Picked Brown The line has been batch picked, but needs to be packed to
be completed.
Picked Black The line has been picked.
Shorted Black The line has been shorted by the dispatcher during
allocation, or by a picker.
Build Grey The order is part of a build-to-order work order and the
line is for an assembled item. The order is waiting for the
work order to be processed, and the finished goods to be
built.
As orders are allocated and picked, the line statuses are updated accordingly:
Note that, if you have the appropriate permissions, you can also directly edit or delete an order
line from this screen, if you need to make changes to the order since it was downloaded, or if
editing the order is necessary for successful allocation. For information on editing orders, see
Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/Packaging Order Line Details on page 262.
UNDERSTANDING PROCESS FLAGS
In addition to order process steps, process flags indicate steps that are required for orders once
they are waved out, according to the end-of-line configuration applied to the carrier for the
SHIP order, or to the order itself. There are six different end-of-line configurations possible for your
implementation, each of which will specify different actions to be performed automatically at
different points of the picking and shipping process, such as printing labels and other
documents, and so on. They are numbered as follows:
0: Default This is the end-of-line configuration that is applied to all orders by default, if
no other is specified.
1: 1-Courier This configuration is usually used for orders shipped by couriers that
define a shipment as a single shipping carton, such as Fedex or UPS.
2: M-Courier This configuration is usually used for orders shipped by couriers that
define a shipment as being made up of multiple cartons, such as Purolator.
3: LTL Truck This configuration is usually used for orders shipped by an LTL carrier,
for which a bill of lading is often required.
4: Pickup This configuration is usually used for orders that are picked up by the
customer.
5: Other This configuration can be used for shipments handled by other means.
The end-of-line process that is applied to the order is displayed in the End of Line field under
the Handling Codes heading in the Packslip Report screen, once an order has been waved.
You can override or apply an end-of-line configuration on the fly from Web Dispatch during
waving, or by using the Ship action; for more information, see Understanding and Modifying
Shipping Method Options on page 92 and Understanding and Modifying End-of-Line
Options on page 103.)
Each end-of-line configuration determines whether the following steps are required for an
order, and specifies any follow-on actions that must be performed once the step has been
accomplished:
An order is batch-picked.
The final pick in an order is completed.
An order has been completely repacked.
The first carton in an order has been scanned.
Any carton in an order has been scanned.
The last carton in an order has been scanned.
The first carton in an order has been added to a pallet.
The last carton in an order has been added to a pallet.
An order has been assigned a bill of lading number.
Shipping has been confirmed by an external shipping system, or by a RADIO BEACON

WMS shipping function.
An external process has been completed.
These milestones are translated into process flags, which are displayed on the order report
screen, with a code of nil, 0, or 1:
In some cases, the values of the process flags also determine the process steps that the order
will pass through, and the point at which process steps are reached. The following table
explains the relationship between process flag values and process steps. If no process is
required for that step, that process step indicated will never be displayed for the order.
Process Flag Value Explanation Triggers this

process step...
Is Started 0 The order has not yet begun to be
picked.
1 The order has been opened for BEING PICKED
picking.
Batch Picked 0/null The order has not yet been picked.
1 The order has been batch picked or all
picked.
All Picked 0/null The order is not yet completely
picked.
1 The last pick is complete.
All Repacked 0/null The order must be repacked, but the BEING
repacking is not complete. REPACKED
1 No process is required when the order
is repacked, or the repacking is
complete.
First Scan 0/null A carton in the order must be RECORD
processed in the Carton Shipping or SHIPMENT
Record Shipment functions on the
handheld, but a carton has not yet
been scanned.
1 No carton scanning is required for the
order, or the first carton in the order
has been scanned.

process step...
Last Scan null Each carton in the order must be RECORD
scanned in the Carton Shipping or SHIPMENT
Record Shipment functions in the
handheld, but all the cartons have not
yet been scanned.
1 Each carton in the order does not need
to be scanned, or the scanning is
complete.
Ship Checkin 0 The order must be scanned in the RATING (if a
Carton Shipping function. shipping system is
notified)
1 The order does not need to be
scanned, or the scanning is complete.
External 0 An external process is required for the EXTERNAL
order, but is not yet complete.
1 No external process is required, or is
complete
BOL 0/nil The order must be assigned a bill of WAITING BOL#
lading number, but the number has not
yet been assigned.
1 A bill of lading number has been
assigned to the order, or the order does
not require a bill of lading.
Packslip 0 A packslip has not yet been printed for
the order.
1 A packslip has been printed.

process step...
Shipped 0 Shipping must be confirmed by the
shipping system, or a RADIO BEACON
WMS shipping function, but shipping
has not yet been confirmed.
1 Shipping does not need to be
confirmed by the shipping system or a
RADIO BEACON WMS shipping
function, or shipping has been
confirmed.
UNDERSTANDING SHIPPING STATUSES
When an order is waved, carton information for the order appears at the bottom of the Packslip
Report screen:
Carton status Carton Track-trace

number number
As orders are picked, the carton display is updated with additional information, and carton
statuses are updated according to the processes required by the orders end-of-line
configuration:
The following table explains the meaning of the carton statuses.
Status Explanation
PRE-RATING The carton is waiting to be pre-rated by an integrated shipping system,
or there is an error in pre-rating.
PRE-RATED The carton has been rated by the shipping system, and shipping costs,
and the carrier (if rate shopping was requested for the order) have
been provided to RADIO BEACON WMS. No information is retained
by the shipping system.
PICKING The order has been opened for picking, but the carton has not yet been
used.
EMPTY The order has been picked but the carton was not used.
SCAN/SHIP The order has been picked, and the carton is required to be scanned in
one of the RADIO BEACON WMS shipping functions.
SCANNED The carton has been scanned in the Carton Shipping or Record
Shipment handheld functions (or with the Mark as Checked In option
in the Ship action in Web Dispatch; see Performing Shipping System
Functions on page 115).
RATING or The carton is waiting to be rated (and manifested, if required) by an
RATING/ integrated shipping system.
MANIFESTING
RATEDSHIP/ The carton has been rated (and manifested, if necessary) by the
MANIFESTED shipping system, and shipping costs and the carrier (if rate shopping
was requested for the order) have been provided to RADIO BEACON
WMS. The carton/order information is retained on the shipping
system.
SHIPPED All shipping processes have been completed for the carton.
UNSHIPPED The order has been picked and marked as shipped, but the carton was
not required to undergo any shipping processes.
CANCELLING The carton is being cancelled by RADIO BEACON WMS.
CANCELLED The carton has been cancelled on the shipping system.
ERROR The shipping system has encountered an error in attempting to rate the
carton, such as missing weights for the shipment.
UNDERSTANDING TYPES OF SALES ORDERS
Because not all sales orders are processed in the same way, it is helpful to recognize the
different types of sales orders that are supported by RADIO BEACON WMS and managed in
Web Dispatch. These include:
Sales orders are issued by the host system and downloaded to RADIO BEACON WMS.
These may follow any numbering convention determined by your setup, but typically they
include the customer number, order number, back order number, customer store number,
customer department number, client number, and warehouse number. They will show
customer information and ship-to information in the Packslip Report. Unless your system
is configured for automatic allocation and/or waving, you must allocate and wave these
orders, and you can apply all actions to them.
Transfer sales orders are issued by the host or created in Web Dispatch order entry for
transferring products from one warehouse site to another via a transit site, using the
warehouse transfer function Transfer sales orders are used to pick the items that will be
LOC
transferred out of the warehouse. Transfer sales orders are, for the most part, processed
identically to regular sales orders from the perspective of the dispatcher and the warehouse
staff. These orders are easy to distinguish in Web Dispatch by the TRANS prefix for all
process steps.
Back orders automatically created by the host system. These will follow the numbering
convention determined by the host system. You process these orders in the same way as
regular sales orders.
Back orders that are automatically created by RADIO BEACON WMS for previous sales
orders that were picked/shipped short. These are numbered in the same way as the original
orders from which they are generated, with the extension -n where n indicates the number
of the back order (e.g. 1, 2, etc.). You process these orders in the same way as regular sales
orders.
Sales orders manually entered by a handheld user through the RADIO BEACON Sales Order
by Walking Around function or by a third-party application. Depending on your
configuration, these are automatically numbered in sequence, with 8 digits, starting with
00000001, or they may be numbered by the user at order entry. Since these orders can only
be created for inventory that is known to be available, they are automatically allocated by
RADIO BEACON and do not need to be waved. Again, depending on your configuration,
they may never appear in Web Dispatch, or they may be treated as already-picked orders,
and will show up in the status of RATING, EXTERNAL or WAITING BOL. You can
therefore use only the actions that apply to orders in these statuses, such as Ship or Nuke.
Sales orders entered through the Web Dispatch Order Entry function. These are
O/E automatically numbered in sequence, with 10 digits, starting with 0000000001, or they
may be numbered by the user at order entry. You process these orders in the same way as
regular sales orders.
Build-to-order assembly orders issued by the host system and downloaded into RADIO
BEACON as sales orders. Also known as explode-on-download, or kit-on-the-fly, these
are build-to-order assembly orders which are treated by RADIO BEACON as regular sales
orders. While the customer may have ordered the items as finished goods, the
components are simply picked as regular products. The only difference between these
orders and regular sales orders is that the Packslip Report will show the finished good as a
line item in addition to the component products. You process these orders in the same way
as regular sales orders.
Build-to-order assembly orders issued by the host system and downloaded into RADIO
KIT BEACON as two separate orders: an assembly order, and a sales order. Usually these order
pairs are prefixed with some kind of code to indicate that they are part of a work order,
such as ASM. The assembly order is numbered the same as its corresponding sales
order, but with the extension .001 (for information on these types of assembly orders, see
Understanding Types of Assembly Orders on page 146). Significantly, however,
although the sales orders that accompany the work orders will appear in Web Dispatch as
UNALLOCATED initially, you do not need to allocate the sales orders. RADIO BEACON
will automatically move them from UNALLOCATED status into an already-picked status,
as determined by their end-of-line settings, as soon as the kitting process for the work
orders is complete. The shipping information for the cartons into which the finished goods
were packed by the kitters is indicated when the kitting process is complete.
Creating a delivery, effects two types of packslipsa new delivery packslip, and the
original packslip, which is defined as the packslip from which items were selected for
the delivery. For more information see, Creating Deliveries In RADIO BEACON on
page 130.
ADDITIONAL SALES ORDER PROCESSING FUNCTIONS
Additional functions that are available in Web Dispatch for processing sales orders include:
Creating and printing bills of lading and/or manifests. For information, see Generating
Bills of Lading and Manifests on page 125.
Exporting manifest information to a text file that can be e-mailed to ATS, a Canadian LTL
carrier. For more information, seePicking a Sales Order on page 128.
Viewing a list of any orders that have not been successfully allocated, and choosing to
release the orders without the HELD SHORT or HELD FORMAT lines. For more
information, seeReleasing Orders with Held Lines on page 85.
Picking a sales order from Web Dispatch. For information, see Picking a Sales Order
on page 128.
Creating a single delivery to a customer from various lines of multiple sales orders. For
more information, see Creating Deliveries In RADIO BEACON on page 130.
ALLOCATING AND RE-ALLOCATING SALES

ORDERS
If your warehouse uses manual allocation, you can allocate any sales orders displayed with the
status UNALLOCATED. You may have business rules in your warehouse that determine when
orders should be allocated, and in what sequence, such as orders that belong to an Alert
category, orders for a particular customer, date required, etc. Or you may simply allocate all
orders as soon as they are downloaded and are displayed in Web Dispatch.
A L L O C A T I N G AN D R E - A L L O C A T I N G S AL E S O R D E R S 6 7
If background allocation is not enabled in your implementation, you will need to manually re-
allocate orders that are in any of the following statuses: HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT,
HELD SHORT, HELD FORMAT.
If your system is configured for background allocation, you may not have to run the initial
allocation or any re-allocation. However, you may need to handle orders that cannot be
successfully allocated automatically. If this is the case, see Understanding Sales Order
Allocation Results on page 78 and Handling Unsuccessfully Allocated Sales Orders on
page 80.
You will also need to manually re-allocate any orders for which you want to change the default
allocation options, or assign new replenishment groups. Note that you can also use the
Reallocate Line action to simply allocate a single line on a sales order, or group of sales orders,
from the Product Report screen only.
When a sales order is allocated, the following occurs:
Stock is reserved from pick bins for the required products (if they are available).
Order and line statuses are updated, as described in Understanding Sales Order
Allocation Results on page 78.
If the system is configured to print these, letdown tickets are printed for products on orders
held for replenishment.
If a fully integrated shipping system is used, and pre-rating is configured for your
SHIP implementation, orders are pre-rated and shipping costs, and selected carrier information
(if rate shopping is enabled for the order), are passed back to RADIO BEACON WMS.
In general, the process for allocating sales orders consists of the following steps:
1. Select the order(s) you want to (re-)allocate. For procedures for selecting orders, see
KIT Note: It is best not to group sales orders and work orders together in the same allocation
batch. For information on allocating work orders, see Allocating and Re-allocating
Work Orders on page 147.
2. Right-click anywhere on the screen you are using, and from the pop-up menu, select
Allocate to allocate the entire order, or Reallocate Line (if available), to re-allocate only
the selected product. The Allocation Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify allocation options for the order(s) you are (re-)allocating. More
information about these options is provided in Understanding and Modifying Sales Order
Allocation Options on page 70.
4. Perform the (re-)allocation, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For
procedures, see General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44.
5. Check the results of the (re-)allocation, as described in Understanding Sales Order

6. For orders that are not moved into READY TO WAVE status, identify an appropriate
method for handling them, as described in Handling Unsuccessfully Allocated Sales
Orders on page 80.
7. If necessary, unallocate previously allocated orders. For procedures, see Unallocating

Sales Orders on page 88.
8. If necessary, re-allocate orders as many times as is necessary to place them into the
READY TO WAVE status.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING SALES ORDER ALLOCATION

OPTIONS
When you use the Allocate action, the Allocation Settings window is displayed.
The options in this screen are populated with default values that have been configured for your
implementation. However, you can modify any of the default settings for particular orders or
groups of orders, if necessary. All the options available in this screen are discussed in the
following sections:
Understanding and Modifying Sales Order Allocation Method Options on page 71.
Understanding and Modifying the Location Allocation Option on page 73.
Understanding and Modifying the Zones Allocation Options on page 73.
Understanding and Modifying Attribute and Expiry Allocation Options on page 74.
Understanding and Modifying Shorts Options on page 75.
Understanding and Modifying Replenishment Options on page 76.
Understanding and Modifying the Zone Sequence Option on page 78.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING SALES ORDER ALLOCATION

METHOD OPTIONS
The action of allocating causes RADIO BEACON WMS to search the warehouses inventory and
match it against the items (products) on the order. By default, RADIO BEACON WMS allocates
product in the following sequence:
1. In order of packsize, from largest to smallest;
2. In order of date received, from oldest to most recent (FIFO);

ZONE
3. From zone to zone in ascending alphabetical order (if multiple zones are used);
4. From bin to bin in ascending alphanumerical sequence.
However, your system may be configured to use a different default method of allocation, such
as strict receipt dates (packsizes are ignored), or strict packsizes (receipt dates are ignored).
Finally, your system will be configured to use FIFO or LIFO by default, and to allocate larger
or smaller packsizes first; however, you can override the latter defaults for individual orders.
The various options for optimizing the allocation process for specific orders are summarized in
the following table.
Option Use to...

Stock Method Specify one of the following allocation methods:
FIFO (First In First Out) Stock will be allocated in sequence by the
date it was received, with oldest stock allocated first.
LIFO (Last In Last Out) Stock will be allocated in sequence by the
date it was received, with newest stock allocated first.
Deplete Smaller If not enough stock is available in the most efficient standard
Packsize packsizes, enable this option to allow smaller packsizes to be allocated
instead.
Option Use to...

Allocate To Specify the quantity to allocate. The host system can download two
values to RADIO BEACON WMS:
Quantity Ordered the ordered quantity is the amount that the

customer actually ordered.
Quantity to pick the quantity to pick is how many the host

system would like (or expects) RADIO BEACON WMS to pick.
Typically, this is the quantity that RADIO BEACON WMS allocates.
In some situations a host system requests RADIO BEACON WMS to

pick what it believes RADIO BEACON WMS has in stock when the
order was downloaded to RADIO BEACON. Since additional stock may
be received in the meantime, selecting the Quantity Ordered instead
allows RADIO BEACON to allocate the amount that the customer
actually wants, thus avoiding a back order situation.
If some of the items have been picked previously and this is now the
backorder, then selecting the Quantity Ordered could result in too
many items being picked.
Therefore, when you allocate in RADIO BEACON, you should specify
the quantity to allocate.
Quantity Ordered Allocate the amount that the customer ordered.
Quantity to Pick Allocate the quantity that the host system has
specified. If you know that this is a back order, select this option to
prevent extra quantities being allocated.
Reserve Minimum If a product has a minimum quantity defined in the database that must
be maintained in the warehouse, enable this option to prevent stock
from being allocated from the reserved quantity.
Fair Share If you are allocating a group of orders destined to several stores for the
same customer, and not enough inventory is available to fill the lines
on all the orders, enable this option to allocate the available stock to all
of the orders on a pro-rated basis. That is, the quantity allocated to
each order will be calculated as a percentage of the total quantity that
each order requires.
Option Use to...

Fifty Rule If a maximum percentage that may be allocated from a D-N-R bin is
specified in your system configuration, enable this option to prevent
any stock that exceeds this percentage from being allocated from a bin.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE LOCATION ALLOCATION

OPTION
If your system supports multiple physical locations, you can use the Location option to specify
from which location(s) stock should be allocated.
Location If RADIO BEACON WMS is managing multiple locations, specify the

LOC physical location(s) from which stock may be allocated and
replenished, and the order(s) shipped. If the field is left blank, all
locations will be included.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE ZONES ALLOCATION OPTIONS
ZONE If your system supports multiple zones, you can specify the zones which should be included
and/or excluded from sales order allocation.
Include Zones Specify zones from which product may be allocated, by entering
each desired zone, or leave blank to include all zones. For example,
entering ABC will result in RADIO BEACON WMS searching only
zones A, B, and C for available product. Product may exist outside
of those defined zones, but RADIO BEACON WMS will not include
those areas in its search for products. The allocation will proceed in
alphabetical zone sequence, regardless of the order of letters you
specify, unless you also select the By Zone Sequence option (see
Understanding and Modifying the Zone Sequence Option on
page 78).
Exclude Zones Specify zones from which product must not be allocated.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING ATTRIBUTE AND EXPIRY

ALLOCATION OPTIONS
If your warehouse uses expiry dates, lots, or other non-unique attributes, sales orders may
ATT specify how products with attribute numbers, or specific expiry dates, should be handled. If the
orders do not specify this information, or if you want to override the settings included in the
orders, you can use the following options to control how products with these attributes should
be allocated.
Option Use to...

Attribute and Expiry Specify whether products with different non-unique attribute
Allocation values, expiry dates, and/or multiple packsizes can be mixed in
the same order. Select one of the following options:
Download Value Use the settings specified in each order.
Single Attribute Expiry Products with different attribute

values, expiry dates, or packsizes can not be mixed in an order.
Multi Attribute/Expiry Products with different attribute values
and/or expiry dates can be mixed in an order, but only a single
packsize may be picked for an order.
Multi-Attribute, Unit-Split Products with different attribute
values, expiry dates, and/or packsizes may be mixed in an order.
# Days to Expiry Exclude products from being allocated that will expire within a
certain number of days. Enter the minimum number of days
before the expiry date. For example, if you enter 365, this will
prevent any products that expire in less than 365 days from being
allocated to the order(s). 0 indicates that no minimum applies and
that products with any expiry date can be included for allocation.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING SHORTS OPTIONS
If all lines in a sales order or group of sales orders cannot be filled because the necessary stock
is not available anywhere in the warehouse that is, the orders are short you can select one
of several ways of handling these orders:
Option Use to...

100% Fill Leave the order unallocated. The order will remain in
UNALLOCATED status and no stock will be reserved for fillable
lines.
Hold for Shorts Reserve stock for fillable lines, and hold the order until missing items
are received and moved into bins in the warehouse. Stock will be
allocated for fillable lines, and the order will be given the status
HELD SHORT.
Auto Short Non- Release the order for picking and shipping, without any non-stock
Stocks items, such as promotional materials, that are not available. Stock will
be allocated for fillable lines, and the order will be given the status
READY TO WAVE.
Auto Short All Release the order for picking and shipping, without the missing items.
Stock will be allocated for fillable lines, non-fillable lines will be
shorted, and the order will be given the status READY TO WAVE.
Pickers will not be directed to pick short products. Depending on your
configuration, your host system or RADIO BEACON WMS will
automatically issue a back order for missing items, or your host
system will cancel the short lines in the order will be cancelled.
Note: You cannot short orders that contain the Ship Complete flag
set to Y (see under Handling Codes in the Packslip Report screen).
Assume Infinite Release the order for picking and shipping, and allow the pickers to
Stock short picks if necessary. Stock will be allocated from pick bins for
fillable lines, short stock will be allocated from the system location
INFINITE, and the order will be given the status READY TO WAVE.
Pickers will not be directed to pick the products allocated from the
INFINITE location, but will have to manually handle those line items.
Note: Only use this option if RADIO BEACON WMS is not managing
your inventory.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING REPLENISHMENT OPTIONS
When RADIO BEACON WMS attempts to allocate a sales order, it will reserve the stock for as
many lines on the order as possible. If all lines cannot be filled because the necessary stock is
not in pick bins in the requested packsizes (in the zones that you have included for allocation),
but product is available elsewhere in the warehouse to fill these lines, you can select one of two
ways of handling these orders:
Option Use to...

Hold for Reserve stock for fillable lines, and hold the order until missing
Replenishment stock is replenished to the appropriate pick bins, in the
appropriate packsizes. Fillable lines will be allocated, the order
will be given the status HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT, and a
replenishment request will be issued for the required stock. If
your system is configured to print letdown tickets, they will
automatically be printed.
Short if not Ready Release the order for picking and shipping, without the items that
could have been replenished. Fillable lines will be allocated, non-
fillable lines will be shorted and the order will be placed into
READY TO WAVE status. Pickers will not be directed to pick
missing products.
Note: If you select this option, you must also select the Auto
Short or Assume Infinite Stock option for short orders (see
Understanding and Modifying Shorts Options on page 75).
Other Shorts options are incompatible and will cause the order to
be HELD FORMAT.
If you choose to hold sales orders for replenishment, you can also specify the following
options:
Option Use to...

Include Zones for SO Specify zones (separate zones for sales order and for kitting) from
ZONE which product may be replenished, by entering each desired zone,
or leave blank to include all zones. For example, entering ABC
will result in RADIO BEACON WMS searching only zones A, B,
and C for available product. Product may exist outside of those
defined zones, but RADIO BEACON WMS will not include those
areas in its search for products. The allocation will proceed in
alphabetical zone sequence, regardless of the order of letters you
specify, unless you also select the By Zone Sequence option (see
Understanding and Modifying the Zone Sequence Option on
page 78).
Replenishment Group Assign a name to the group of replenishment requests that will be
issued for this group of orders. This name appears in the Letdown
Stock replenishment function on the handheld (for information,
see Letting Down Stock in Using RADIO BEACON Handheld
Functions). By using a meaningful name, you can indicate to
replenishers the urgency or priority of the replenishment request,
or a destination to which the stock should be brought. For
example, assigning a date or time stamp to the replenishment
group could indicate the appropriate sequence in which
warehouse staff should replenish stock.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE ZONE SEQUENCE OPTION
For allocation and replenishment, you can use the following option to control exactly how
product is allocated from zone to zone by using the following option:
Option Use to...

By Zone Sequence Allocate and replenish from zone to zone in exact sequence you
ZONE specify in the Include Zone and Include Zones for
Replenishment fields. For example, if you specify ACB as
include zones, and you select this option, the allocation and
replenishment will use this sequence, rather than the normal ABC
alphabetical sequence.
UNDERSTANDING SALES ORDER ALLOCATION RESULTS
When you are returned to the Orders summary screen, and have refreshed it, the orders you
have attempted to allocate will show their new statuses.
The following table summarizes the possible allocation results for sales orders.
Status Explanation
READY TO WAVE The order(s) have either been completely filled from product in
pickable bins, or have been allowed to be shipped short. They are
now ready to be waved in Web Dispatch (or by pickers if allowed,
from the handheld); for procedures for waving in Web Dispatch,
see Waving and Re-waving Orders on page 99.
Orders marked READY TO WAVE with a wave number of 990
indicate that they have been successfully allocated, but are
waiting for other orders that have been assigned the same
consolidation number to be allocated. Such orders cannot be pre-
rated or waved in the normal fashion until all orders with the
same consolidation number have been successfully allocated. If
you need to release these orders for picking, you need to unwave
them (see Unwaving Orders on page 111) and then re-wave
them.
Status Explanation
HELD FOR The order(s) contain lines that require products that are not
REPLENISHMENT available in pick bins in the packsizes required, in the zones you
specified during allocation. Lines that can be filled are allocated
and stock is reserved for them; however, for lines that require
product from elsewhere in the warehouse, staff must first
replenish the required products, or you must take alternative
measures for the order(s). If your system is configured to do so,
letdown tickets are automatically printed. For more information
on handling orders in this status, see Handling Short Orders on
page 81.
HELD SHORT The order(s) contain lines that require products that are currently
unavailable. Lines that can be filled are allocated and stock is
reserved for them; however, for lines that require unavailable
product, stock must be received into inventory, or you must take
alternate measures. For more information on handling orders in
this status, see Handling Short Orders on page 81.
UNALLOCATED The order(s) contain lines that require products that are currently
unavailable, and 100% fill was selected during the allocation. No
lines are allocated and no stock is reserved for the order(s). For
lines that require unavailable product, stock must be received into
inventory before the order(s) can be successfully allocated.
WAITING - SWOG The order(s) has been marked to be shipped with other goods.
Lines that can be filled are allocated and stock is reserved for
them. However, other orders for the same customer and shipping
address that are not marked to be shipped with other goods must
be successfully allocated before the order can be marked READY
TO WAVE. For more information on handling orders in this
status, see Handling Waiting - SWOG Orders on page 87.
SUSPENDED There is some problem in the order(s) that needs further
investigation. For more information on handling orders in this
status, see Handling Orders with Errors on page 82.
Status Explanation
HELD FORMAT The order(s) contain lines that require products available in the
warehouse; however, the product could not be allocated correctly
due to an incompatibility with the order, allocation, or
replenishment options. For more information on handling orders
in this status, see Handling Held Format Orders on page 83.
WAIT - PRE-RATE If a fully integrated shipping system is used, and pre-rating is
SHIP required for the order(s), the order is waiting for the shipping
system to pre-rate it, or there has been an error in pre-rating. For
more information on handling orders in this status, see Handling
Orders with Errors on page 82.
HANDLING UNSUCCESSFULLY ALLOCATED SALES ORDERS
If an order or group of orders is allocated successfully, the orders appear in Web Dispatch with
the status of READY TO WAVE, and can be released for picking. If an order appears with any
other status, the allocation has not been successful, and you and/or other warehouse staff need
to rectify the situation in a way that will allow the order to be re-allocated successfully
(regardless of whether you perform the re-allocation manually or the system does it
automatically). The following sections discuss how to handle the different types of orders that
cannot be fully allocated:
Handling Short Orders on page 81.
Handling Orders with Errors on page 82.
Handling Held Format Orders on page 83.
Releasing Orders with Held Lines on page 85
Handling Wait Pre-Rate Orders on page 87.
Handling Waiting - SWOG Orders on page 87.
HANDLING SHORT ORDERS
For orders that are held because some lines contain unavailable products orders in
UNALLOCATED, HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT, HELD SHORT there are several
options for handling these:
Wait until products have been replenished or received. For orders held for replenishment,
this is probably the most efficient method for handling these orders, as replenishing can
often be performed, and the products made available for picking, in the same day. For
orders held short that are not urgent or of high priority, and you know that new stock is to
arrive shortly, this is also a reasonable approach.
If you need to manually re-allocate such orders, you may wish to run various inventory or
receiving reports to check for inventory updates that affect these orders. For held for
replenishment orders, you can run the Replenishment Report (for information, see
Replenishment Report on page 244) that shows all outstanding replenishment requests;
once these have been cleared, you will know that the products for the held orders have
been replenished.
For held short orders, reports that may be useful to you include the Rush Items Report,
Short Products Report and Product Inventory Report may be useful. For information on all
of these, see Chapter 7, Generating Reports on page 201.
Release an order as a Pack & Hold order. This option may be used for very large orders
for which you want to begin the picking process and reserve the stock by physically
removing it from the bins. For more information on this option, see Packing and Holding
Orders on page 109.
Release stock by unallocating other orders. For orders held short that are urgent, you may
wish to free up stock from lower priority orders by unallocating them. For more
information on unallocating orders, see Unallocating Sales Orders on page 88.
For orders held short and held for replenishment, release the order(s) without the missing
products or components, if this is an acceptable option for your customers. To do this,
manually re-allocate the order(s), and select the Short if Not Ready option for orders held
for replenishment, and the Auto Short All option for orders held short. This will pre-
short the missing lines, and place the order(s) in READY TO WAVE status. When the
orders are waved, pickers will simply not be directed to pick the missing lines. Depending
on your configuration, back orders may automatically be generated for the missing
products.
You can also release the orders without the HELD SHORT lines using the Exception
report. For information, see, Releasing Orders with Held Lines on page 85.
Note: You cannot short orders that contain the Ship Complete flag set to Y (see under
Handling Codes in the Packslip Report screen).
For orders held short only, if RADIO BEACON WMS is not tracking the inventory, release
the order to pickers, and allow the pickers to manually find the missing stock in the
warehouse, or use another manual procedure for handling the order. To do this, manually
re-allocate the order, and select the Short if Not Ready and Assume Infinite Stock
options. This will allocate the short lines from a virtual location called INFINITE and
place the order in READY TO WAVE status. When the order is waved, pickers will simply
not be directed to pick the missing lines. You may also want to print pick tickets or pre-
packslips when waving such orders, so that pickers will know which items have been
allocated from the INFINITE location (see Understanding and Modifying Wave Label
Printing Options on page 105 for more information on these label types).
HANDLING ORDERS WITH ERRORS
An order marked SUSPENDED indicates that there is something amiss with the order itself,
such as a negative quantity ordered. The error that caused the order to be suspended is often
noted in the Packslip Report. To handle these orders, you must first edit the field(s) in the order
that caused the problem (for information, see Editing Sales, Work, Packaging and Transfer
Sales Orders on page 260), unsuspend them (for more information, see Unsuspending
Orders on page 119), and if necessary, re-allocate them manually.
HANDLING HELD FORMAT ORDERS
The status of HELD FORMAT indicates that there is stock somewhere in the system for
products required for the order, but that the stock cannot be allocated, for various reasons,
including:
The on-hand stock is in a packsize that does not match the packsize specified in the order.
The on-hand stock is in the process of being moved or replenished and is in a temporary
system location, such as TRANSIT or REPLENIS, where it cannot be accessed until it is
put away to pick bins.
If you handle expiry-dated product, the on-hand stock will expire sooner than allowed by
the order(s).
ATT If you handle products with attributes such as lot or serial numbers, the on-hand stock uses
attributes that do not match the attributes required in the order.
ZONE If you are using multiple zones, the on-hand stock is in a zone that was not included for
allocation or replenishment when the allocation was run.
LOC If you are using multiple warehouses or locations, the on-hand stock is in the wrong
warehouse or location.
The line details in the Packslip Report show each bin from which the system attempted to
allocate or replenish the wrong format product and the reason the product could not be
successfully allocated.
The type of allocation that was attempted: pick or

replenishment. PICK indicates that the system
The quantity that
tried to allocate the product from a pick bin. REPL
was not able to be
indicates that the system tried to generate a
allocated or
replenishment request from a pick or overstock
replenished.
bin.
The bin from which the The reason for which

system attempted to allocate the allocation or
or replenish the product. replenishment failed.
Once you have identified the nature of the problem, you can do any of the following before the
order is re-allocated:
Wait until products have been replenished or put away to their final pick bin homes. If you
need to manually re-allocate such orders, you may wish to run various inventory reports to
check for inventory updates that affect these orders. You can run the Product Report (for
more information, see Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221), which shows
all current locations for the product, including TRANSIT, REPLENIS, and other
temporary locations; once the product has been cleared from those locations and moved to
pick bins, the order may be re-allocated.
Release stock by unallocating other orders. For orders held format that are urgent, you
may wish to free up stock from lower priority orders, or other orders that were not fully
allocated, by unallocating them. For more information on unallocating orders, see
Unallocating Sales Orders on page 88.
Release the orders without the HELD FORMAT lines, using the Exception report. For
information, see, Releasing Orders with Held Lines on page 85.
Manually re-allocate the orders with different, less restrictive allocation options. These
include:
Enabling the Deplete Smaller Packsize option, which will allow other packsizes to
be allocated to fill the order.
ZONE
Including additional zones for allocation and/or replenishment.
Edit the order itself, if you have the permissions to do so. If the order has specified
allocation options that are too restrictive, in terms of zones, or packsizes, edit these fields
in the order to make them less restrictive. For example, if the customer will accept
alternate packsizes, simply specify a packsize of 1, and the system may allocate whatever
packsize it finds to fill the line. To edit order lines, see Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/
Packaging Order Line Details on page 262. i
RELEASING ORDERS WITH HELD LINES
At any time, you can run an Exception report that displays all lines in sales orders that are in
HELD SHORT and HELD FORMAT status (or ASMBL-HELD SHORT for work orders). It
indicates to the dispatcher which lines on orders could not be allocated successfully. From this
report, you can release orders without missing products, to be shipped short.
> To release orders with Held lines:
1. Go to the Reports module.
2. Click the Picking tab to display the Picking Reports screen.
3. Next to the Exception Report selection click Go.
4. Orders with lines in HELD SHORT and HELD FORMAT status is displayed.
5. Select the order(s) you want to release with shorted lines. For procedures for selecting
orders, see General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44.
Release.
7. Optionally enter a Handle, and click Release.
Once the line(s) are released, the order(s) will be updated to HELD RELPLENISH or READY
TO WAVE, depending on the status of the fillable lines on the order. The lines that were
released in the Exception report are shorted on the order. Depending on your configuration,
back orders may automatically be generated for the missing products.
HANDLING WAIT PRE-RATE ORDERS
An order marked WAIT PRE-RATE indicates that the shipping system has encountered an
SHIP error in attempting to pre-rate the order. To try to identify the problem, you can check your
shipping system, view the Shipping Errors Report (see Shipping Errors Report on page 216),
or view the log for the order (see Generating the Log Reports on page 314). Most often, this
error occurs because weights have not been recorded for the products in the order. In this
situation, you can unallocate the orders (see Unallocating Sales Orders on page 882), enter
weights for the products in the order by editing the appropriate lines in the order (or, more
permanently, by editing the products themselves for more information, see Maintaining
Products on page 266), and then re-allocate the orders.
Alternatively, you can skip pre-rating by applying the Skip Pre-Rating option from the Ship
Settings window, which will move the order(s) into READY TO WAVE status automatically,
so that they can be waved immediately. The procedure for skipping pre-rating is described
below.
> To skip pre-rating for an order or group of orders:
1. Select the order(s) for which you want to skip pre-rating. For procedures for selecting
2. Right-click anywhere on the screen you are using, and from the pop-up menu, select Ship.
The Ship Settings window is displayed.
3. Under the Immediate Action for Orders options, enable Skip Pre-Rating.
4. Click Submit, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For procedures, see
General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44. When all orders have been
processed, they should be updated with the status of READY TO WAVE.
HANDLING WAITING - SWOG ORDERS
An order marked WAITING - SWOG indicates that the order has been marked to be shipped
SHIP with other goods (that is, the ShipwOther field is set to Y; see under Handling Codes in the
Packslip Report screen). Normally, you do not need to take any action for these orders; as soon
as another order for the same customer and shipping address that is not marked to be shipped
with other goods is allocated, the WAITING - SWOG order will automatically be moved into
READY TO WAVE status.
However, if the order has been waiting too long and no other orders can be allocated for the
customer, you can release the order for waving by applying the Release for Ready-Wave
option from the Ship Settings window. This will reset the ShipwOther field to N, and move
the order(s) into READY TO WAVE status, so that they can be waved immediately. The
procedure for releasing WAITING - SWOG orders is described below.
> To release an order or group of orders that were held to be shipped with other goods:
1. Select the order(s) you want to release. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44.
3. Under the Immediate Action for Orders options, enable Release for Ready-Wave.
processed, they should appear in READY TO WAVE status.
UNALLOCATING SALES ORDERS

You most typically use the Unallocate action to free up stock from allocated or held orders so
that it can be re-allocated to higher priority orders that were held because of missing stock. You
may also need to unallocate an order if a customer requests changes to the order since it was
allocated, especially if those changes include cancelling some line items.
You may also unallocate held orders if you need to edit the orders themselves before re-
allocation, or to re-allocate with different options. Although this step is not necessary before re-
allocation of such orders, if you need to re-allocate multiple orders, and want to be sure to
optimize the re-allocation, unallocating all of them first may produce better results.
You can unallocate orders in any of the following statuses: READY TO WAVE, HELD FOR
REPLENISHMENT, HELD SHORT, HELD FORMAT, WAITING - SWOG, WAIT PRE-
RATE.
When you unallocate orders, the following occurs:
Stock that was reserved is unreserved.
Orders and lines are updated with the status UNALLOCATED.
Note: Unallocating orders that belong to replenishment groups does not clear the
replenishment groups for those orders. If you want to change the replenishment group
for orders, you must apply a new group name to them when you re-allocate.
Note: Orders with the status of SUSPENDED cannot be unallocated. They must be
unsuspended before they can be processed further; for more information, see
Unsuspending Orders on page 119.
> To unallocate an order or group of sales orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to unallocate. For procedures for selecting orders, see
Unallocate. The Unallocate Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally enter a Handle, and click Submit, and refresh the display in the Orders
summary screen. For procedures, see General Procedures for Processing Orders on
page 44. When all orders have been processed, they should be updated with the status of
UNALLOCATED.
4. Re-allocate the orders when appropriate, by following the instructions in Allocating and
Re-allocating Sales Orders on page 67.
U N A L L O C A T I N G S AL E S O R D E R S 8 9
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING SHIPPING

OPTIONS
The default shipping options and actions defined for an order are determined by the end-of-line
SHIP configuration specified for the carrier selected for the order, or for the order itself. The shipping
options available in Web Dispatch are of two types:
Options that allow you to change the shipping data and processes pre-defined for the order
before they are picked and processed in shipping; the second consist of actions that
actually serve to process the order by performing specific shipping functions on-the-fly.
This set of options is described here.
Options are described in Performing Shipping Actions on page 112. Other options
include pre-rating, skipping pre-rating, and releasing orders held to be shipped with other
goods; these options are described in Pre-rating Orders on page 98, Handling Wait Pre-
Rate Orders on page 87, and Handling Waiting - SWOG Orders on page 87,
respectively.
The order shipping options that you can modify include method of shipping, label printing,
truck routes, order consolidation, and carton check-in options defined for orders. If you want to
modify these options, you can do so at any point in an orders life cycle, although making
changes before the orders are waved out will require fewer additional changes or processes.
When you modify these options, an order is updated with the values you have specified, but the
process step for the order does not change unless you specify a different end-of-line
configuration, or a different carrier with a different end-of-line configuration defined for it.
> To modify shipping options for an order or group of orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to modify. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
3. Modify any of the following settings:
To modify general shipping settings, see Understanding and Modifying Shipping

Method Options on page 92.
To modify label formats, see Understanding and Modifying Label Printing Options
on page 93.
To modify order consolidation options, see Understanding and Modifying Shipment

Consolidation Options on page 95.
U ND ER S T A N D I N G A N D M O D I F Y I N G S H I P P I N G O P T I O N S 9 1
To modify truck route options, see Understanding and Modifying Truck Route
Options on page 94.
To modify RADIO BEACON WMS shipping function options, see Understanding and
Modifying Carton Check-In Options on page 97.
4. Click Submit. The order(s) will be updated with the settings you specified.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING SHIPPING METHOD OPTIONS
You can change the general shipping settings for orders at any time. However, keep in mind
that you may need to change other shipping options as well. If you change a carrier or ship
options once orders have been picked, you may need to have cartons re-rated and manifested.
Option Use to...

Carrier Service Specify or change the carrier or carrier service by which the order
will be shipped. Select the appropriate carrier/service from the
drop-down list. The options available are determined by your
configuration.
Change Payment Specify or change the payment method for the shipment. Select
Method from the following default options:
Prepaid
Bill Recipient (On Account)
Consignee/Collect
Third-Party
Ship Options Specify or change the shipment option used for the order. Select
the appropriate option from the drop-down list. The options
available are determined by your configuration.
Option Use to...

End of Line Apply the settings defined for one of the following end-of-line
configurations to the order (for information, see Understanding
Process Flags on page 59):
Default The settings defined for the default end-of line
configuration.
1-Courier The settings defined for shipments sent via couriers
that define a shipment as being made up of a single carton.
M-Courier The settings defined for shipments sent via couriers
that define a shipment as being made up of multiple cartons.
LTL Truck The settings defined for shipments sent via LTL
carriers.
Pickup The settings defined for orders that are picked up at
the warehouse.
Other The settings defined for shipments sent via any other
method.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING LABEL PRINTING OPTIONS
Picking/shipping and carton contents label formats are normally specified in the settings for the
orders carrier or in the order itself. However, you can override the format for picking/shipping
labels, carrier-compliant picking/shipping labels, or carton contents labels to be printed for an
order or group of orders, by using the following options:
Option Use to...

Customer Label Assign the format of the customer-compliant picking/shipping
label(s) to be printed for the orders during waving (listed as the
Customer Label on the Wave Settings window; see
Understanding and Modifying Wave Options on page 101).
Select the appropriate format from the drop-down list. The
options available are determined by your configuration.
Note: Be sure to set this option before waving the order(s).
Option Use to...

Carrier Label Assign the format of the carrier-compliant picking/shipping
label(s) to be printed for the orders during waving (listed as the
Customer Label on the Wave Settings window). If, for example,
you have changed the carrier for the order, you will want to select
another carrier-compliant label. Select the appropriate format
from the drop-down list. The options available are determined by
your configuration.
Note: Be sure to set this option before waving the order(s).
Carton Contents Label Assign the format of the carton contents label(s) printed for the
orders after picking. Select the appropriate format from the drop-
down list. The options available are determined by your
configuration.
Note: Be sure to set this option before the point at which these
labels are to be printed, as determined by your end-of-line
settings for the order(s).
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING TRUCK ROUTE OPTIONS
If you manage your own fleet of trucks, you can assign a truck route and truck stop to orders.
Normally, these are assigned when the orders are created, but if they have not been assigned, or
if you need to modify the settings, you can do so with the following options.
Option Use to...

Truck Route Assign or modify the truck route for an order or group of orders.
Enter the identifier for the truck route in the field.
Truck Stop Assign or modify the truck stop for an order or group of orders.
Enter the identifier for the truck stop in the field.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING SHIPMENT CONSOLIDATION

OPTIONS
Often, you may wish to combine orders that are to be shipped to the same destination by the
same carrier at the same time into a single shipment, to take advantage of reduced shipping
costs. Your integrated shipping system may assign BOL/manifest or consolidation numbers to
such orders, when they are rated and manifested. Alternatively, your host system may apply
consolidation numbers to the orders when they are downloaded to RADIO BEACON WMS.
However, if you want to use Web Dispatch to assign BOL/manifest and consolidation numbers
to orders, you can do so by using the Shipping Controls options in the Ship Settings window.
If an order has an end-of-line configuration applied to it that requires that a bill of lading
number be assigned to it, you must assign a number to it, either by using the BOL options on
the Ship action window or by generating a BOL/manifest in Web Dispatch (to generate a bill of
lading from Web Dispatch, see Generating Bills of Lading and Manifests on page 125).
When you flag orders for consolidation, they are still picked as separate orders, but are treated
as a single shipment by the shipping system, and must be shipped together. To search for orders
that may be potentially consolidated, you can run the Order Consolidation Opportunities
Report, which shows all customers with multiple outstanding orders (for more information, see
Order Consolidation Opportunities Report on page 215).
Note: You can also consolidate orders by actually combining them into a single order by
using the Consolidate if Possible option when waving. For more information, see
Consolidating Orders on page 109.
You can apply these options at any time before the orders are to be processed by a shipping
system. However, if you mark orders for consolidation before they are allocated, orders that are
marked as READY TO WAVE may be held from waving if any other orders with which they
are to be consolidated cannot be successfully allocated. They will be assigned a wave number
of 990 and can not be waved normally; if you need to wave and pick such orders, you must
unwave the order(s), which will remove the 990 wave number, before waving the order. For
information, see Unwaving Orders on page 111.
Note: Be sure to apply these options only to orders with the same ship-to address.
Option Use to...

Assign Next BOL Assign BOL/manifest or shipment consolidation numbers to
Number orders, by having the system apply the next available number.
The number will consist of your manufacturing ID (or 999999 if
you do not use one) and/or a sequential number. Select from one
of the following options:
Assign BOL Assigns the next available bill of lading/manifest
(pickup) number in the system to the order(s). If you apply this
option to multiple orders, each will be assigned the same number.
Assign Consolidation Assigns the next available
consolidation number in the system to the order(s). If you apply
this option to multiple orders, each will be assigned the same
number.
Assign to both Assigns the next available number to both the
BOL/manifest (pickup) number and the consolidation number.
That is, the BOL and consolidation numbers will be the same. If
you apply this option to multiple orders, each will be assigned the
same numbers.
Consolidation Number Assign a shipment consolidation number to orders, by specifying
the number. If you apply this option to multiple orders, each will
be assigned the same number. If the orders have not yet been
allocated, successfully allocated orders will be held in READY
TO WAVE status (with a wave number of 990), and cannot be
waved until all other orders with the same consolidation number
have been successfully allocated. (To wave and pick such orders
before all consolidated orders have been allocated, you must
unwave the orders to remove the 990 wave number, and then
wave the orders.)
BOL/Manifest Number Assign a bill of lading/manifest (pickup) number to orders, by
specifying the number. If you apply this option to multiple orders,
each will be assigned the same number.
Option Use to...

Probill/Shipment Assign a probill/shipment number to orders, by specifying the
Number number. If you apply this option to multiple orders, each will be
assigned the same number.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING CARTON CHECK-IN OPTIONS
Depending on the type of shipping system your warehouse is using, if any, and your
warehouses requirements, order shipping cartons may need to be checked in by the
handheld Carton Shipping function, which records the weights and carton numbers for all
cartons in an order, and in some cases passes this information to an integrated shipping system;
for more information on these functions, see Chapter 8, Shipping Orders in Using RADIO
BEACON Handheld Functions.
You can apply the following options to orders at any time before the cartons are to be scanned,
that is, in any carton status up until and including SCAN/SHIP (for more information, see
Understanding Shipping Statuses on page 63):
Option Use to...

Display Hold Message If the cartons are to be checked in via the handheld Carton
Shipping function, alert the user who is scanning them to hold the
carton, and display an explanatory message. Enter the message
you want to appear. For example, this could tell the user to
perform a specific action such as Enclose the Invoice.
Capture Barcode If the cartons are to be checked in via the handheld Carton
Shipping function, prompt the user to scan an additional barcode.
For example, this can be useful if a shipping label is to be printed
by a standalone shipping system, and the tracking number on the
label needs to be captured.
PRE-RATING ORDERS
Pre-rating allows an integrated shipping system, such as ClipperShip or NeoPost, to provide an
SHIP estimated shipping cost based on the weights of products in orders and, if your system is
configured for rate shopping, to determine the cheapest carrier and service for the order. This
information is passed back to RADIO BEACON WMS and any errors, such as a bad address or a
carrier/service that is not available for the destination, are reported, so that you may correct
problems before orders are even picked.
Normally, if your system is configured to have an integrated shipping system pre-rate orders,
the pre-rating occurs at allocation. However, you can use the Pre-Rate option from the Ship
Settings window to have the shipping system pre-rate orders in READY TO WAVE status on-
the-fly.
Note: If a group of orders is assigned a consolidation number, either by the host system, or
through the Ship action in Web Dispatch (see Understanding and Modifying
Shipment Consolidation Options on page 95), none of the orders can be pre-rated
until all orders have been successfully allocated. If you want to wave and pick these
orders anyway, you will need to assign a shipping carrier and service manually,
through the Ship actionsee Understanding and Modifying Shipping Method
Options on page 92 for more information.
> To pre-rate an order or group of orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to pre-rate. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
3. Under the Immediate Action for Orders options, enable Pre-Rate.
processed, they may appear in WAIT PRE-RATE status; when the pre-rating is complete,
the orders will be returned to READY TO WAVE status.
If orders encounter errors in pre-rating, they will be placed into WAIT PRE-RATE status. For
suggestions on how to handle these, see Handling Wait Pre-Rate Orders on page 87.
WAVING AND RE-WAVING ORDERS

You can wave orders with the status READY TO WAVE. You can wave orders with the Pack &
Hold option for orders in the following statuses: HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT, HELD
SHORT.
You can also use the Wave action to consolidate orders. Consolidating two orders combines the
line items from multiple orders into a single order so that the all line items can be shipped as a
single shipment.
Finally, for orders that have been split by the host system, but should be linked, you can specify
that linked orders be suspended while they wait for the orders with which they are linked to be
fully allocated.
When orders are waved, the following normally occurs:
The orders waved together are assigned a wave number (a four-digit number starting at
1000).
Note: Waving a group of orders together does not necessarily assign them all to the same
wave. You can control how orders are grouped in waves by limiting the wave size; for
more information, see Understanding and Modifying Workload Options on
page 102.
W AV I N G A N D R E - W A V I N G O R D E R S 9 9
Picking/shipping labels are printed for the orders, based on the default label rules set in the
configuration, or by the options you select during waving.
The number of cartons required to pack each order is estimated, and a unique carton
number (or totelabel) and track-trace number is generated for each carton.
A big number is assigned to all cartons in an order (a one- or two-digit number from 1 to
99), and printed on picking/shipping labels.
If you have chosen to consolidate orders, all orders in the wave, except one, are removed
from the system, and the lines from those orders are moved into a single order.
Orders are updated with the appropriate status, as described in Understanding Wave
Results on page 110.
The general process for waving consists of the following steps:
1. Select the order(s) you want to wave and/or consolidate. For procedures for selecting
Wave. The Wave Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify waving options for the order(s) you are waving. More information
about these options is provided in Understanding and Modifying Wave Options on
page 101.
4. Perform the waving, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For
5. Check the results of the waving, as described in Understanding Wave Results on

page 110.
6. If necessary, unwave previously waved orders. For procedures, see Unwaving Orders on
page 111.
7. If necessary, re-wave previously unwaved orders to make them available for picking
again.
1 0 0 CHAPTER 2 P R O C E SS I N G S AL E S O R D E R S
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING WAVE OPTIONS
When you use the Wave action, the Wave Settings window is displayed.
The options in this screen are populated with default values that have been configured for your
groups of orders, if necessary. All the options available in this screen are discussed in the
following sections:
Understanding and Modifying Workload Options on page 102.
Understanding and Modifying End-of-Line Options on page 103.
Understanding and Modifying Wave Label Printing Options on page 105.
Understanding and Modifying the Linked Order Option on page 108.
W AV I N G A N D R E - W A V I N G O R D ER S 1 0 1
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING WORKLOAD OPTIONS
When you group orders together for waving, you may wish to create predetermined waves of
orders that will be distributed to individual pickers for picking, depending on the picking styles
used in your warehouse and particular picker characteristics, such as the volume they can
typically handle in a specific time period. Therefore, you can use the following options to
control the workload of a given wave.
Options Use to...

Max # Orders: Limit wave sizes to a specific total number of orders to be given
to pickers. Enter the maximum number of orders to be included in
the same wave. For example, if you are waving 12 orders
together, entering 4 in this field will result in three waves of four
orders each. Each wave will be assigned a different wave number.
Max # Lines: Limit the wave size to a specific total number of lines to be given
to pickers. Enter the maximum number of lines to be included in
the same wave. For example, entering 12 in this field will result
in waves of orders with no more than a total of twelve lines in
each wave.
Note: If there are orders in the batch that contain more lines than
the maximum you specify, they will still be waved, but will be
assigned to separate wave numbers.
Max # Units: Limit the wave size to a specific total number of units to be given
to pickers. Enter the maximum number of units to be included in
the same wave. For example, entering 1500 in this field will
result in waves of orders with no more than a total of 1500 units
in each wave.
Note: If there are orders in the batch that contain more units than
the maximum you specify, they will still be waved, but will be
assigned to separate wave numbers.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING ZONE WAVING OPTIONS
Include Zones Specify the zones in which orders must have picks for them to be
ZONE waved. For example, entering ABC will result in only orders with
picks in zones A, B, and C being waved. Orders that have picks in
zones A, B, and C, and also have picks outside of those defined
zones, will still be waved; orders that do not have picks inside
those zones will not be waved.
You can use this option to control zone picking styles. For
sequential zone picking styles, you would typically wave a group
of orders in one zone, and assign that wave to one picker, and
then wave a group of orders in a second zone, and assign that
wave to a second picker. For simultaneous zone picking styles,
you would wave orders in both zones together, and simply
distribute the orders for each zone to the appropriate picker, or
enter 99 for the Printer option (see Understanding and
Modifying Wave Label Printing Options on page 105) to have
the labels print to printers in the appropriate zones.
Exclude Zones Specify the zones which must not be included in this wave. For
example, entering B will result in orders with picks in zone B
being excluded from this wave.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING END-OF-LINE OPTIONS
Normally, any end-of-line requirements are determined by the end-of-line configuration

selected for the carrier for the order or for the order itself. (For information on these, see
SHIP Understanding Process Flags on page 59.) However, you can modify the end-of-line
assignment on-the-fly by using the End of Line option to specify one of the following
configurations listed in the table below (if you leave this field blank, the Default
configuration will be used).
Note: If you need to make changes to the end-of-line configuration after an order has been
waved, you can use the Ship action to do so. For more information, see
Understanding and Modifying Shipping Method Options on page 92.
Option Use to...

End of Line Apply the settings defined for one of the following end-of-line
configurations to the order (for information, see Understanding
Process Flags on page 59):
Blank Keep the end-of-line setting already defined in the
order.
Default Use the settings defined in the default end-of line
configuration.
1-Courier Use the settings defined in the end-of-line
configuration for shipments sent via couriers that define a
shipment as being made up of a single carton.
M-Courier Use the settings defined in the end-of-line
configuration for shipments sent via couriers that define a
shipment as being made up of multiple cartons.
LTL Truck Use the settings defined in the end-of-line
configuration for shipments sent via LTL carriers.
Pickup Use the settings defined in the end-of-line
configuration for orders that are picked up at the warehouse.
Other Use the settings defined in the end-of-line configuration
for shipments sent via any other method.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING WAVE LABEL PRINTING OPTIONS
You can modify default label printing settings by using any of the following options:
Option Use to...

Optimize Packing If picking/shipping and/or contents labels are to be printed, select
Carton Type the type of labels that should be printed for all the orders in the
wave:
Blank Use the carton type already assigned in the orders
themselves.
Carton Print carton picking/shipping and/or contents labels
for all orders.
Pallet Print pallet picking/shipping and/or contents labels for
all orders. The track-trace number will include a 1 or 2.
Truckload Print truckload picking/shipping and/or contents
labels for all orders. The track-trace number will include a 3.
Optimize Packing Assign the format of customer picking/shipping labels, if they are
Customer Label to be printed (see below). Note that this setting overrides any
options specified in the Ship Settings window (see
Understanding and Modifying Label Printing Options on
page 93).
Labels Per Order Print the following number of picking/shipping labels:
Use Calculated Qty Print the number of labels defined by the
label rules in your system configuration. (You may need to
consult with your system administrator to determine what these
are.) If you are waving any orders that are to be full case-picked,
be sure that this option is selected.
Start with 1 Label Print 1 label for each order in the wave.
More labels can be produced during the picking process as
required.
Labels Print a batch pick label. This label contains no carton
Wave Label information, and is used for batch picking orders.
Option Use to...

Labels Print a pre-packslip label for each order in the wave. This label
Pre-Packslip lists all items for an order. You can use these in any situation
where the picker needs to know all the products that were
originally ordered. It can also show the prices of the products on
the order.
Label Print a label that lists all items for an order, and allows pickers to
Pick Ticket write in the quantities picked for each product, for each order in
the wave. This label is usually used to help train pickers learning
to use RADIO BEACON WMS.
Labels Print a label for each order in the wave, that lists the lines, units,
Packing Planner and cube of all the products in the order, by product class, to help
pickers and packers plan the equipment and packaging needed to
pick and ship the order.
Note: This label is only populated if product classes are defined
in your database. For more information, consult your system
administrator.
Labels Print a customer picking/shipping label for each order in the
Customer Label wave. Depending on your system configuration, this may print
carrier-specific pick/ship labels, customer-specific pick/ship
labels, or both. You can also modify the format of the labels, by
using the Optimize Packing: Customer Label option described
above.
Labels Print a paper pick ticket on a laser printer, for each order in the
Crystal Pick Ticket wave. This is often used for supermarket picking styles.
Option Use to...

Sort Slapper Labels When you select Customer Labels and/or Wave Labels, specify
how you want carton labels sorted when they print:
By Order Carton labels are sorted by order number (default).
By Bin Carton labels are sorted by bin number.

By Pallet To sort by pallet, you must have a value in the Max
Cube field, which indicates that you wish to palletize orders in
the wave. The By Pallet option should be selected when you
palletize orders. For more information see, Understanding and
Modifying Palletizing Options on page 108.
Printer# (99-Scatter) Specify a printer on which picking/shipping labels and other

requested labels are to be printed. Either enter the number of a
single physical printer on which all labels are to be printed (for
information, see Label and Document Printing in the document
Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS) for this wave, or enter 99
to scatter the printing among all the zones in which there are
picks in this wave. Note that batch pick labels, however, cannot
be scattered, as only one label will print per wave; if you use the
99 setting in this field, the batch pick label will print to printer #1.
Note: This option does not affect Crystal Pick Tickets, which are
printed on laser printers.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE LINKED ORDER OPTION
Some orders are split into multiple orders when they are downloaded. Although these orders
have the same order number in the host system, they are assigned different packslip numbers in
RADIO BEACON WMS. These orders are known as linked orders. If you want to ensure that
linked orders are picked and shipped together, you can use the following option:
Option Use to...

Wait All Linked Orders Suspend orders that are linked to other orders that have not yet
been successfully allocated. The orders will be placed into
SUSPENDED status, and cannot be picked until they are
unsuspended. Once the linked orders are successfully allocated,
you will need to manually unsuspend the SUSPENDED orders
(see Unsuspending Orders on page 119).
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING PALLETIZING OPTIONS
When you group orders together for waving, you may wish to assemble cartons in the orders
into pallets for shipping or transfers. Palletizing can only be used with full case-picking. You
will need to specify the volume the pallet can handle, and if any of the cartons in the wave need
to be separated from the rest of the cartons that are palletized together.
When you use the palletize function, Wave (Batch) labels are automatically printed, with pallet
ID. The number of labels printed is:
Total cubage for the wave / maximum cube for each pallet (Max Cube field).
Options Use to...

Max Cube Enter the maximum cube value, in the unit of measure used in
your warehouse, that can be included in a pallet. When you enter
a value in this field, the palletize function is activated.
Separate Load #1 Enter a zone to exclude from the pallet. Picks from this zone will
be waved at the end and will not get the pallet labels.
Separate Load #2 Enter an additional zone to exclude from the pallet. Picks from
this zone will be waved at the end and will not get the pallet
labels.
Sort Slapper Labels By Pallet Select the By Pallet option. The order in which
carton slapper labels will be sorted and printed, is by pallet.
PACKING AND HOLDING ORDERS
You can release an order for picking, even if some of the lines have not been allocated, by
packing & holding it. This will pre-short the missing lines, and place the order in PACK &
HOLD status. The pickers will simply not be directed to pick the missing lines, and the order
will remain in BEING PICKED status. Releasing an order for pack & hold may be expedient
for very large-volume or labour-intensive orders, so that picking can begin even before all lines
can be filled.
Typically you will suspend the order when available items have been picked (see Suspending
Orders on page 118 for information), unsuspend it for completion when the missing items are
available (for information, see Unsuspending Orders on page 119), re-allocate it to reserve
the stock from the appropriate bins, and continue to process the order in the normal manner.
To release an order for packing and holding, use the following Wave option:
Option Use to...

Pack & Hold Wave an order for picking an order without all items being
allocated.
CONSOLIDATING ORDERS
You can consolidate multiple orders destined for the same customer and shipping address, so
that the orders are both picked and shipped as a single order. (This process is distinct from
applying consolidation numbers to multiple orders via the shipping options; see
Understanding and Modifying Shipment Consolidation Options on page 95 for more
information.) When you consolidate orders, all lines on the orders are placed on the lowest-
sequence order, and the other orders are deleted from the system. The consolidated order is
placed into WAVED status and then picked and shipped as a regular order.
If you wave multiple orders together when consolidating, only orders with the same customer
number and ship-to address will actually be consolidated.
Note: Once you have consolidated orders, the original orders are deleted. You can not
unconsolidate an order by unwaving it.
To consolidate orders, use the following Wave option:
Option Use to...

Consolidate if Possible Consolidate multiple orders for the same customer and ship-to
address into a single order for picking and shipping.
UNDERSTANDING WAVE RESULTS
have attempted to wave will show their new status. The following table summarizes the
possible wave results for sales orders.
Status Explanation
WAVED The order(s) are ready to be picked, and will proceed through the normal
process steps until they are shipped. Wave numbers, big numbers and
carton numbers are assigned to orders. Picking/shipping and other
additional labels, if requested, are automatically printed.
READY TO The order(s) were marked to be shipped together (consolidated) with other
WAVE orders that have not yet been successfully allocated. Orders with this status
are assigned a temporary wave number of 990. You can only wave these
orders by first applying the Unwave action to them (for information, see
below), and then re-waving them.
PACK & The order(s) are ready to be picked, but will remain in the BEING
HOLD PICKED status until you take further action for the order(s). Wave
numbers, big numbers and carton numbers are assigned to orders. Picking/
shipping and other additional labels, if requested, are automatically
printed.
UNWAVING ORDERS
You may need to unwave orders if you need to change shipping options for the orders, print
additional types of labels, or consolidate orders. You can unwave orders that are in WAVED,
PACK & HOLD or BEING PICKED status, or in READY TO WAVE status with a wave
number of 990.
When you unwave an order, the following occurs:
Orders are returned to the status they occupied before being unwaved.
The wave number and carton numbers assigned to the order may be discarded.
> To unwave an order or group of orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to unwave. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
Unwave. The Unwave Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify the unwaving option for the order(s) you are unwaving. More
information about this option is provided in Understanding and Modifying the Unwave
Option on page 112.
4. Perform the unwave, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For
procedures, see General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44. When all orders
have been processed, they should be updated with the status which they held prior to being
unwaved.
5. Re-wave the orders when appropriate, by following the instructions in Waving and Re-
waving Orders on page 99.
U N W A V I N G O R D ER S 1 1 1
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE UNWAVE OPTION
When an order is waved, carton numbers are generated for each carton estimated to be required
for the order. When you unwave an order, you have the option of deleting or saving the carton
labels that were already generated for the order previously. If you delete these carton labels, the
carton numbers may be assigned to cartons in subsequently waved orders. If you do not delete
the carton labels, the carton numbers will not be assigned to other cartons but will remain
reserved for the original order(s). This option will be set by default by your configuration, but
you can modify this default, as follows:
Option Use to...

Delete Unused Labels Delete the carton numbers assigned to the order(s) originally,
so that the label numbers may be used again for other
cartons/orders.
PERFORMING SHIPPING ACTIONS

The Immediate Actions options in the Ship Settings window allow you to manually apply
SHIP particular actions to orders. These include triggering integrated shipping system processes such
as re-rating, clearing rating errors, and performing RADIO BEACON WMS carton scanning and
shipment recording functions. You can use these options to apply an action that was not
originally defined for the order, to override a process that may be holding up an order, or to
skip a handheld shipping function to expedite the order.
You can only apply these processes at the appropriate points in the orders life cycle, which are
indicated in the following sections. When you apply these processes, the following occurs:
Filled cartons are updated with the relevant status.
The order may be moved into the next process step.
The general process for performing shipping actions consists of the following steps:
1. Select the order(s) you want to process. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
3. Select from one of the following options:
To skip pre-rating for orders in WAIT PRE-RATE status, see Handling Wait Pre-Rate
Orders on page 87.
To release orders in WAITING - SWOG status, see Handling Waiting - SWOG

Orders on page 87.
To pre-rate orders in READY TO WAVE status, see Pre-rating Orders on page 98.
P E R F O R M I N G S H I P P I N G A C T I O N S 1 1 3
To skip carton scanning for orders in BEING PICKED, READY TO SHIP or

RATING status, see Performing or Bypassing Carton Scanning on page 114.
To skip or perform carton check-in functions for orders in any status from READY
TO SHIP to SHIPPED, see Performing Shipping System Functions on page 115.
4. Perform the action, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For procedures,
see General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44. When all orders have been
processed, carton and order statuses should be updated as noted in the following sections.
PERFORMING OR BYPASSING CARTON SCANNING
For orders that were required to be checked in with the Carton Shipping function on the
handheld, you can use the following options to force an automatic carton scanning while the
order is still being picked, or after the order has been picked:
Option Use to...

Carton Ship Perform carton scanning for orders that were required to be processed with
the Carton Shipping function on the handheld. Any processes that are
required to be performed during Carton Scanning will be executed.
You can apply this option to orders that are in BEING PICKED, READY
TO SHIP or RECORD SHIPMENT status.
Mark as Bypass carton scanning for orders that were required to be processed with
Checked-In the Carton Shipping function on the handheld. The carton(s) will be
treated as already scanned, will skip the SCAN/SHIP status, and be placed
into the next status defined for the order(s).
You can only apply this option to orders that have already been picked and
are in READY TO SHIP or RATING status.
PERFORMING SHIPPING SYSTEM FUNCTIONS
You can use several options that perform actions normally handled by the Carton Shipping or
Record Shipment functions on the handheld (for more information on these, see Chapter 8,
Shipping Orders in Using RADIO BEACON Handheld Functions):
Notify ShipSys: This action passes carton and shipment information for an order or group
of orders to a shipping system for rating/manifesting, in the same way as the Carton
Shipping function from the handheld. This option can be applied to orders in any status
after they are picked. Described in Notifying the Shipping System on page 115.
Clear Rating Errors: This action clears any shipping errors that have been incurred by
orders on the shipping system, in the same way as the Carton Shipping function. This
option can be applied to orders in RATING status. Described in Clearing Shipping
Errors on page 116.
Mark as Shipped: This action marks an order as shipped, whether or not the order has
undergone any shipping processes. This option can be applied to orders in READY TO
SHIP, RECORD SHIPMENT, and RATING statuses.
NOTIFYING THE SHIPPING SYSTEM
You can use the following options to process orders that were required to be held until a
manual process is performed on the shipping system, to re-rate orders for which you have
changed the carrier after they were rated initially, or to re-rate orders after errors have been
cleared (see Clearing Shipping Errors on page 116):
Option Use to...

Notify Cause the integrated shipping system to rate (and manifest) the carton(s) in
Shipping the order(s).
System
You can apply this option at any point after an order has been picked, until
even after it has been marked as shipped. To specify the cartons in the
order that should be processed by the shipping system, use the Orders to
Notify Shipping System options, described below. When the cartons are
processed by the shipping system, the status of the cartons will be updated
to RATING or RATING/MANIFESTING and the order will be moved into
the next process step, depending on the process flags for the order.
Option Use to...

Include When sending information to the shipping system, include orders/cartons
Unscanned that have not yet been scanned through the Carton Shipping function on
Orders the handheld.
Scanned that have already been scanned through the Carton Shipping function on
Orders the handheld, but that could not be fully processed and marked SHIPPED
(for example, that incurred errors).
Shipped that have already been processed by the shipping system and marked as
Orders SHIPPED.
Ignore Allow orders to be processed by the shipping system outside of the
Required Date shipping window defined in your RADIO BEACON WMS configuration.
For example, if orders may not be processed until two days or less before
they are required, you can use this option to allow the order(s) to be
processed by the shipping system more than two days before the order is
required.
CLEARING SHIPPING ERRORS
You can use the following option to bypass rating for the order(s) if the order is held up in
RATING status, or to clear rating errors and run the Notify ShipSys option (see Notifying the
Shipping System on page 115):
Option Use to...

Clear Rating Automatically clear rating errors. The action clears the errors encountered
Errors by any cartons, and updates the cartons status to SCANNED.
are in RATING status.
MARKING ORDERS AS SHIPPED
You can use the following options to force the cartons in the order to be marked as shipped,
whether or not they have been processed by shipping functions, or an integrated shipping
system:
Option Use to...

Mark as Bypass RADIO BEACON WMS handheld shipping functions that were
Shipped required for the order(s), and manually process the cartons. If you use this
option, you can also use the Orders Marked as Shipped options to record
shipment information (see below).
are in READY TO SHIP, RECORD SHIPMENT, or RATING status. This
action will cause the status of the cartons to be updated to SHIPPED, and
will move the order into the next process step, depending on the process
flags for the order.
Shipment If you select the Mark as Shipped option above, manually record the
Number shipment number for the order.
Cost of If you select the Mark as Shipped option above, manually record the cost
Shipping of shipping for the order.
Date Shipped If you select the Mark as Shipped option above, manually record the date
the order was shipped.
Release for If the order has been successfully marked as shipped, or if you select the
Upload Mark as Shipped option above, this option completes the Mark External
function, if it is required for the order, and releases the order for upload.
SUSPENDING ORDERS
While sometimes an order may automatically be suspended by the system due to a problem
with the order, you may also choose to suspend orders from time to time. Suspending an order
leaves it visible in Web Dispatch at whatever point in the process it was in, and holds it so that
no further processing may be applied to it, until you unsuspend it (see Unsuspending Orders
on page 119).
You may wish to manually suspend orders for a number of reasons, including a front-office
request that the order be held in the warehouse until an appropriate shipping date; a pack &
hold or other type of order that has been picked for all available lines but is waiting for stock
for other lines to arrive at the warehouse; cases where pickers find that products that the system
thought were available are actually missing from bins; or any other orders that require some
manual intervention or customer approval before they can be completed. You can suspend
orders in any status.
When orders are suspended, the following occurs:
The orders are placed into the status SUSPENDED.
The orders are assigned to a wave number of 999.
> To suspend an order or group of orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to suspend. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
Suspend. The Suspend Settings window is displayed.
3. In the Error Message field, enter a comment that indicates the reason you are suspending
the order(s). This message is displayed in the details and Packslip Report screens for the
order(s).
processed, they should be updated with the status of SUSPENDED.
5. Unsuspend the orders when appropriate, by following the instructions in Unsuspending

Orders on page 119.
UNSUSPENDING ORDERS
You must unsuspend any orders that are in SUSPENDED status before any further action can
be performed on them. You will typically unsuspend an order when it is ready for further
processing because, for example, missing stock has arrived to fill remaining lines.
When you unsuspend orders, the following occurs:
Orders that were waved but not yet picked are placed into READY TO WAVE status.
Orders that were picked are placed into BEING PICKED status.
The 999 wave number is cleared.
> To unsuspend an order or group of orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to unsuspend. For procedures for selecting orders, see
Unsuspend. The Unsuspend Settings window is displayed.
processed, they should be updated with the status they held prior to being suspended.
U NS U S P E N D I N G O R D ER S 1 1 9
CANCELLING OR EXPEDITING SALES ORDERS

Nuking a sales order is an exceptional way of handling sales orders in Web Dispatch at any
point. Nuking can actually accomplish two different functions for different circumstances:
Nuke and delete cancels the sales order and removes it from RADIO BEACON WMS;
it is used in the case where a customer has cancelled an order and it is too late or inefficient
to cancel it from the host system.
Nuke and upload actually expedites the sales order by bypassing all of the normal
RADIO BEACON WMS process steps and reporting the quantity of product picked to the
host system. You may want to use this action to process a rush order for a customer; to
process orders that have been allocated assuming infinite stock; or to expedite any other
orders that can be processed more efficiently by manual handling than by being passed
through the normal allocation, picking, and/or shipping steps.
Note: Your system will have configured the Nuke action to either cancel or upload orders by
default. If you need to handle an order differently, be sure to modify the appropriate
nuking options, as described below.
When you nuke orders, the following occurs:
Any end-of-line processes that were configured for the order, such as automatic document
printing, are cancelled.
If the order is not deleted, it is assigned a wave number of 997.
Depending on the options you select, orders are held and given the status EXTERNAL;
shipped and marked READY TO UPLOAD (in most implementations, this status is not
displayed, as pick confirmations are automatically uploaded to the host system); or deleted
from RADIO BEACON WMS and removed from the Web Dispatch display.
The general process for cancelling or expediting sales orders consists of the following steps:
1. Select the order(s) you want to cancel or expedite. For procedures for selecting orders, see
2. Right-click anywhere on the screen you are using, and from the pop-up menu, select Nuke.
The Nuke Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify nuking options for the order(s). More information about these options
is provided in Understanding and Modifying Sales Order Nuke Options on page 121.
4. Perform the nuke, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For procedures,
see General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44.
5. Check the results of the nuke, as described in Understanding Nuking Results on

page 124.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING SALES ORDER NUKE OPTIONS
When you use the Nuke action, theNuke Settings window is displayed.
The options in this screen will be populated with default values that have been configured for
your implementation. However, you can modify any of the default settings for particular orders
or groups of orders, if necessary. All the options available in this screen are discussed in the
following sections:
Understanding and Modifying Order Handling Options on page 122.
Understanding and Modifying Host System Reporting Options on page 124.
C AN C E L L I N G O R E XP ED I T I N G SA L E S O R D ER S 1 2 1
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING ORDER HANDLING OPTIONS
You use the Picked Goods and Unpicked Goods options to determine how the order or orders
are to be handled. If you want to completely cancel the order(s), you will normally want to
return any already-picked goods to stock, and cancel and unallocate unpicked goods. If you are
expediting the order(s), you will normally want to mark the already-picked goods as shipped,
and pick and relieve the unpicked goods.
If you are cancelling the order, you will want to release it without a packing slip; if you are
expediting it, you can either hold it until a manual process is executed, such as printing a
packslip, or ship it without one.
Option Use to...

Ship Mark already-picked goods as shipped. If the Show Qty
Picked option is also selected (see Understanding and
Modifying Host System Reporting Options on page 124),
the quantity of goods picked will be uploaded to the host
system.
Return to Stock Return already-picked goods to the bins from which they
originated. The warehouse staff will need to manually move
the stock back into the appropriate pick bins. If the Show Qty
Picked option is also selected (see Understanding and
Modifying Host System Reporting Options on page 124),
the products will be shown as shorted.
Return to TRANSIT Return already-picked goods to the TRANSIT location. The
warehouse staff will need to use the Direct Move In function
to move the stock back into the pick bins of their choice. If
the Show Qty Picked option is also selected (see
Understanding and Modifying Host System Reporting
Options on page 124), the products will be shown as
shorted.
Return To BIN Return already-picked goods to the bin that you specify. The
warehouse staff will need to manually move the stock back in
the appropriate pick bins. If the Show Qty Picked option is
also selected (see Understanding and Modifying Host
System Reporting Options on page 124), the products will
be shown as shorted.
Option Use to...

Cancel & Unallocate Unallocate unpicked goods from the order and make them
available for other orders. If the Show Qty Picked option is
also selected (see Understanding and Modifying Host
System Reporting Options on page 124), the products will
be shown as shorted.
Pick & Relieve Fill the order by automatically picking the remaining lines,
and depleting the inventory. If the Show Qty Picked option
is also selected (see Understanding and Modifying Order
Handling Options on page 122), the quantity of goods
picked will be uploaded to the host system.
Hold for Packslip Hold the order for manual processing. The order will be
placed in the status of EXTERNAL, and will need to be
marked as having gone through the external process before
being completed. For more information, see Understanding
Nuking Results on page 124.
Release Without Cancel or ship the order without a packing slip or any manual
processing.
C AN C E L L I N G O R E XP ED I T I N G SA L E S O R D ER S 1 2 3
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING HOST SYSTEM REPORTING

OPTIONS
You use the Report to Host and Backorder options to determine how the order(s) will be
uploaded to the host system. If you want to completely cancel the order(s), you will normally
want to delete the order(s), and cancel any missing items. If you want to expedite the order(s),
you will normally want to upload a pick confirmation to the host system, and create a back
order for any items not picked.
Option Use to...

Show Qty Picked Pass the actual quantities picked to the host system.
Nuke & Delete Completely remove this order from the RADIO BEACON WMS
system and do not report anything to the host system.
Ok to Backorder Create a back order for any items that have not been picked.
Note: Your system must be configured to allow RADIO BEACON
WMS to create back orders for your warehouse.
Cancel Remainder Cancel any outstanding quantities on the order.
UNDERSTANDING NUKING RESULTS
have Nuked will either have disappeared from the display (if you selected nuke and
delete), or will show their new status. The following table summarizes the possible nuking
results for sales orders.
Status Explanation
READY TO The pick confirmation(s) are ready to be uploaded to the host system. This
UPLOAD status will only display if you selected nuke and upload, and if your
system is not configured to upload pick confirmations automatically
(otherwise, the orders will simply disappear from the display).
EXTERNAL You selected to hold the order during nuking. The order must undergo a
manual process and be marked as having done so, through the Mark
External function on the handheld. For more information, see Marking
External Processes Complete in Using RADIO BEACON Handheld
Functions.
GENERATING BILLS OF LADING AND MANIFESTS

You can generate bills of ladings (BOLs) and manifests from Web Dispatch, for orders that will
SHIP be shipped to customers such as large retailers, that will only receive the goods against these
accompanying documents. Bills of lading list all the orders and customer PO numbers in a
shipment, and summarize groups of products by tare or freight code. Manifests list all of this
information, plus more detailed information, such as the exact store or distribution centre to
which each order in the shipment is destined.
The documents are actually laid out by Crystal Reports template files that must be configured
for your system, but Web Dispatch provides you with an online form to fill out, and
automatically populates the form with basic shipping information.
You can generate a single bill of lading or manifest for each order in a shipment, or add
multiple orders to a single bill of lading or manifest for an entire shipment.
Generally, there are three steps to generating a bill of lading and/or manifest in Web Dispatch:
1. Optionally, if you want to assign a group of orders to the same BOL number, and/or
consolidation number, or if you want to define the numbers to be applied to an order or
orders, use the Ship action to apply Shipping Controls options to the orders, before they
are waved out. For information, see Understanding and Modifying Shipment
Consolidation Options on page 95.
2. Add an order to a bill of lading, begin to add information to it, and save it. This can be
done any time after the order(s) are fully picked. For procedures, see Adding an Order to
a Bill of Lading/Manifest on page 126.
3. Edit the bill of lading or add any remaining information to it, and print the bill of lading
and/or manifest. This is usually done after any shipping processes have been completed for
the order(s). For procedures, see Viewing, Editing, and Printing an Existing Bill of
Lading on page 128.
G EN E R AT I N G B I L L S O F L A D I N G A N D M A N I F E S T S 1 2 5
ADDING AN ORDER TO A BILL OF LADING/MANIFEST
Even if you have assigned BOL and/or consolidation numbers to orders with the Ship action,
you must still add the order or orders to a bill of lading to actually generate the bill of lading.
When you add a single order to the bill of lading, if multiple orders have been assigned to the
same BOL or consolidation number, they will automatically be added to the same bill of lading
as well.
> To add an order or orders to a bill of lading/manifest in RADIO BEACON WMS:
1. If you want to do any of the following, use the Ship action at any time (preferably before
the order(s) are waved out), as described in Understanding and Modifying Shipment
Consolidation Options on page 95:
Specify the BOL and/or consolidation number for an order or group of orders.
Add multiple orders to the same BOL and/or consolidation number.
2. Open the Packslip Report for any order to be added to the same bill of lading.
3. In the Packslip Report screen, click the BOL button. The BOL Report screen is displayed,
with the BOL number, your shipping address, the customers shipping address, and some
basic shipment information
4. If this data is available, enter a service code, shipment, freight, and/or special services
information in the relevant fields.
5. To save the bill of lading, click Submit. The bill of lading is saved, and all fields are
displayed as uneditable.
6. To edit or print the bill of lading, follow the procedures in Viewing, Editing, and Printing
an Existing Bill of Lading on page 128.
G EN E R AT I N G B I L L S O F L A D I N G A N D M A N I F E S T S 1 2 7
VIEWING, EDITING, AND PRINTING AN EXISTING BILL OF LADING
Once an order or orders have been added to a bill of lading, and the bill of lading has been
saved, it can be opened for editing and printing from various screens in Web Dispatch.
> To open an existing bill of lading:
1. Do any of the following:
From the Packslip Report screen of any order assigned to a single bill of lading, click
the BOL button.
From the Miscellaneous Reports screen in the Reports module, next to the BOL
Report selection, enter the number of the bill of lading you want to view in the BOL#
field, and click Go.
In the Orders details screen, under the Pickup Number field, click the number link for
the bill of lading you want to view.
The bill of lading is opened in read-only mode.
To edit the BOL, click Edit BOL. The screen is re-displayed, in editable mode. Edit
the desired fields, and click Submit to save.
To print the bill of lading using your warehouses Crystal Reports template for a bill
of lading document, click Print BOL. The bill of lading is printed.
To print the bill of lading using your warehouses Crystal Reports template for a
manifest document, click Print Manifest. The manifest is printed.
PICKING A SALES ORDER

The Quick Order Completion facility allows you to pick the products for a waved order with
Web Dispatch rather than from the handheld. This may be useful in situations where handhelds
are not available. After the order is picked manually, you use Quick Order Completion to
record the products and quantities that were picked. You can also select the numbers of the
cartons into which the products were packed.
You can complete orders in the status of WAVED or BEING PICKED only.
> To complete a sales order:
3. Next to the Quick Order Completion selection, in the Packslip field, enter the order
number and click Go. The Quick Order Completion screen for the order is displayed, with
line and carton information in the middle of the page.
4. Verify that the quantity and carton information is correct for each line, and make any
necessary changes.
P I C K I N G A S A L ES O R D E R 1 2 9
5. Optionally, edit the Picker and Ship Via fields, if necessary.
6. Optionally, to print additional carton labels, in the Ship Labels field, enter the number of
labels you want to print.
7. Optionally, to create a Bill of Lading for the order, click the BOL button and follow the
procedure in Adding an Order to a Bill of Lading/Manifest on page 126.
8. Optionally, to edit the sales orders, click the Edit button.
9. Optionally to view a log of the entries and activities for this sales order, click the Log
button.
10. Click Confirm when you are satisfied that the information you entered is correct.
When you click Confirm, the order is marked as picked and moves into the next process step
determined for the order.
CREATING DELIVERIES IN RADIO BEACON

The create delivery functionality allows you to include partial or complete lines from multiple
sales orders into a single delivery for a specific customer and ship-to address. When you create
a delivery, you do not need to add all lines or all quantities on a selected sales order to the
delivery. Instead, you can create deliveries consisting of only selected lines and even partial
quantities from a line.
UNDERSTANDING THE CREATE DELIVERY FUNCTION
You create deliveries from open sales orders for the same customer and same ship-to address.
Open sales orders are UNALLOCATED, which have not been LOCKED (see Locking
Packslips on page 132 for more information.
The Create Delivery function provides flexibility in building the delivery, allowing you to:
create multiple deliveries from a single packslip
create a deliver from multiple packslips (all orders to the same customer and ship-to
address)
include only specifically selected lines from the sales order in the delivery
include partial quantities of sales order lines in the delivery.
Creating a delivery results in two types of packslips:
A new delivery packslipWhen a delivery is created, a new packslip document for the
specified lines and quantities is created. The new packslip has an ORDER TYPE of
Delivery and includes a link(s) to the original packslip(s) from which items for the
delivery were taken.
The delivery packslip is processed like any other RADIO BEACON picking document,
including allocating, waving, creating a BOL, etc., except the Nuke function. When the
delivery has been completed, the packslip is uploaded to the host.
The original packslipThis is defined as the packslip from which items were selected for
the delivery. The original packslip displays an additional section, the Created Delivery
section, which links to the packslip reports for deliveries that were created from this sales
order.
When you create a delivery (or deliveries) that includes all items from a sales order, the
original packslip is not required. It could be deleted, but it is maintained in SHIPPED &
UPLOADED status in case the delivery is discarded and the original packslip needs to be
restored. Although the status is SHIPPED & UPLOADED, the packslip has not actually
been uploaded to the host.
When you create a delivery (or deliveries), but some of the items are left on the original
packslip, the original packslip remains in the system. In the packslip details, any line that
was included in a delivery, no longer displays in the original order. However, if you
included a partial quantity in a delivery, the original quantity displays in the Ordered QTY
column, while the remaining quantity displays in the Packslip QTY column. When items
remain on the original packslip, the unallocated packslip will moved to LOCKED status
when the delivery is processed. See Locking Packslips following.
C R E AT I N G D EL I V E R I E S I N R AD I O B E A C O N 1 3 1
LOCKING PACKSLIPS
When a delivery is waved, the remainder portion of orders that have been split for deliveries
but not allocated are moved to the LOCKED process step. In LOCKED status no actions can
be performed on packslip.
When the deliveries are uploaded to the host, the LOCKED orders are deleted from RADIO
BEACON WMS. Eventually the remaining items and quantities are backordered by the host or
by RADIO BEACON, depending on the configuration.
CREATING A DELIVERY
> To create a delivery:
3. Next to the Create a Delivery selection, click Go. The Create a Delivery screen is
displayed
4. In the Delivery Number field, enter a number for this delivery.
5. In the Customer Number field enter a customer, or optionally click the question mark
beside the field to display a list of customers with open sales orders. If a customer has
more than one ship-to address, the customer number & ship-to address combination will
be a separate selection.
6. Click the customer under the Customer/Ship heading to select that customer and click
Close.
7. From the Available Orders drop-down list, select a sales order containing the line(s) you
want to add to the delivery, or select All to include all open sales orders for that customer.
The order details display.
C R E AT I N G D EL I V E R I E S I N R AD I O B E A C O N 1 3 3
8. To select lines to add to the delivery, do one of the following:
To select all lines and quantities for this order, click Select All.
To select a partial quantity of a line, in the Quantity Split field, enter the quantity you
want. To deselect a line, in the Quantity Split field, enter 0. Click Add Selected.
The line item(s) appear in the Selected Items tab.
9. If necessary, you can delete any line by clicking the delete icon .
10. To add lines from another sales order, repeat steps 7 to 9.
11. When you have finished adding all items to the delivery, click Create Delivery.
USING CLONE PICKING

Clone picking allows you to process identical sales orders quickly. Identical sales orders means
that the sales orders must be to the same customer and all details for the sales order (such as the
number of lines, line details, shipping information, etc.) are all the same.
The clone picking process is implemented as follows:
1. A group of identical orders is allocated. All orders that you want to clone pick must be
fully allocated.
2. One order is processed using any pick and pack procedure.
3. From Web Dispatch, display the Orders details screens for sales orders in READY TO
WAVE status.
U S I N G C L O N E P I C K I NG 1 3 5
4. Select the order(s) you want to clone pick. For procedures for selecting orders, see
5. Right-click anywhere on the screen, and from the pop-up menu, select Clone Picking. The
Clone Settings window is displayed.
6. In the Master Order field, enter the order number of the first (original) order processed.
7. Optionally, in the Packslip Printer field enter the number of the printer for Packing Slips.
8. Optionally, in the Label Printer field enter the number of the printer for Shipping labels.
9. Optionally enter a Handle, and click Submit.
The results of the clone picking are as follows:
RADIO BEACON generates one label per carton per order based on how the original
order was packed, and automatically packs the same products into the same cartons, in the
same quantities as the original order.
The orders are marked as completely picked and moves into the next process step
determined for the master order (for example, READY TO SHIP, READY TO UPLOAD,
SHIPPED AND UPLOADED
The following orders will be ignored even if selected and if the Clone action is applied to them:
Orders that are not exactly the same as the master order
Orders that have already been partially picked
Orders that are not fully allocated
CANCELLING CLONE PICKING

As long as cloned sales orders have not been uploaded the host, clone picking can be undone
and returned to READY TO WAVE status.
To unclone an order or group of orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to unclone. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
Unclone. The Unclone Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally enter a Handle, and click Submit. When all orders have been processed, they
should be returned to READY TO WAVE status.
EXPORTING MANIFEST INFORMATION

If you use are using ATS as an LTL carrier in your warehouse, you can export manifest
SHIP information for the days shipments to a text file that can be e-mailed to ATS. One file is
written for a selected date, to the server directory in which the RFBase executable is stored.
The file is named with the date on which the manifest information was exported in YY/MM/
DD format.
Note: In future, this function will be expanded to support additional LTL carriers.
If you export shipments several times in a single day, all the records will be written to the same
text file.
C A N C E L L I N G C L O N E P I C K I NG 1 3 7
> To export manifest information to a text file for ATS:
3. Next to the Manifest Report selection, click Go. The Manifest Report screen is displayed.
4. Select the ATS check boxes only. For procedures for selecting orders, see Selecting
Orders on page 41.
5. Right-click, and from the pop-up menu that appears, select Export Manifest ATS. The
Export Manifest settings window appears.
6. In the Date Ship field, enter the date of the shipments which you want to write to the text
file were shipped, in MM/DD/YYYY format, or leave the field blank to select todays
date. Any shipments that have not yet been exported, up to and including the date you
specified will be included.
7. Click Submit. The shipping information for the orders you selected are exported to a text
file written to the RADIO BEACON WMS installation directory.
> To view the manifest information you have exported:
1. In the Reports module, click the Picking tab to display the Picking Reports screen.
2. Next to the Manifest Report selection, click Go. The Manifest Report screen is displayed,
with a list of all manifests created for the previous seven days.
3. Click the number of the manifest you want to view. The manifest information is displayed,
as described in Manifest Report on page 220.
E X P O R T I N G M A N I F E S T I N F O R M A T I O N 1 3 9
3 PROCESSING ASSEMBLY
KIT
ORDERS
ABOUT PROCESSING ASSEMBLY ORDERS

Assembly, or work orders are similar to sales orders in that they are viewed in the Orders
module, order details are viewed in the Packslip Report screen, and work orders need to be
allocated. However, although the same pop-up menus and allocation screens appear for work
orders in Web Dispatch, not all of the options actually apply to work orders. This chapter
discuses the different types of work orders, the actions, options, and statuses that apply to them,
and special considerations you need to take into account when processing work orders. Before
continuing, you are advised to review the chapter Understanding RADIO BEACON WMS
Concepts in the document Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS.
The following sections provide conceptual background information on working with assembly
orders:
Understanding Assembly Order Actions and Statuses on page 142.
Understanding the Work Order Packslip Report Screen on page 143.
Understanding Types of Assembly Orders on page 146
1 4 1
UNDERSTANDING ASSEMBLY ORDER ACTIONS AND STATUSES
You can apply the following actions to work orders:
Allocate
Unallocate
Nuke
Note that the Wave, Unwave, Suspend, Unsuspend, and Ship actions do not apply to work
orders.
The following sections provide an overview of these actions, the stage in the processing cycle
at which you normally perform them, and the sections in this chapter in which they are
described. For an overview of work order process steps, see Understanding Process Steps on
page 26.

this status...
Allocate stock to work orders that ASSEMBLY - Allocating and Re-
have not yet been allocated. UNALLOCATED allocating Work Orders
on page 147.
Re-allocate orders that were not ASSEMBLY - SHORT Allocating and Re-
allocated successfully, or have been allocating Work Orders
only partially allocated. on page 147.
1 4 2 CHAPTER 3 P R O C E SS I N G A SS E M B L Y O R D E R S
You can use the Unallocate action to do the following:

this status...
Unallocate previously allocated work ASSEMBLY - WAIT Unallocating Work
orders and free up reserved stock. REPLEN Orders on page 155.
ASSEMBLY - READY
ASSEMBLY - SHORT

this status...
Cancel an order and, optionally, delete any Cancelling Work
it from RADIO BEACON. Orders on page 156.
UNDERSTANDING THE WORK ORDER PACKSLIP REPORT SCREEN
The Packslip Report screen tells you all the details about a work order, and is helpful for
monitoring and troubleshooting a work order throughout all stages of the warehouse cycle,
from initial allocation to upload to the host system. The following sections describe portions of
the report screen that you can use to monitor a work orders progress:
Understanding Work Order Line Statuses on page 144.
Understanding Work Order Assembly Info on page 145.
A B O U T P R O C E S S I N G A S S E M B L Y O R D ER S 1 4 3
UNDERSTANDING WORK ORDER LINE STATUSES
The Packslip Report for the work order shows the finished goods and components and service
items as separate line items. The finished good item will always be shown as the first line item
and will be given the status of Comment, as will service items and co/by-products. The actual
components will be marked with allocation statuses, which can be helpful for troubleshooting
purposes. In the example below, the order has been held short because of the last component.
Line number Finished good Components Line status
Line statuses are marked and color-coded as follows:
Status Color Explanation

Indicator
Comment Gray The line is a finished good, a co/by-product, or a service item.
Unalloc Black The component has not been allocated.
Bin label(s) Blue The component is to be replenished from the overstock bins
indicated.
Short Red Inventory of this component product is not available anywhere
in the warehouse. The line requires that product be received
before the order can be allocated.
Note that if replenishment is required to move component products into the work area, the lines
in this section of the report always display the original bins from which the products were
replenished, and not their current locations. You will know whether or not the component items
have been replenished by examining the Assembly info portion of the screen, as described
below.
UNDERSTANDING WORK ORDER ASSEMBLY INFO
The Assembly Info portion of a work order Packslip Report provides details about the kit
recipe and the progress of the kit-building process. The product quantities shown indicate the
stage that the order has reached in the assembly process: if the order has been allocated, and the
required quantities are displayed in the In Work Area and Can Pull fields, the kits are ready to
be built; if these fields do not show the required quantities, the work area needs to be
replenished with inventory from overstock or other bins in the warehouse. In the following
example, the order has been allocated, but the order is awaiting replenishment of the
component items.
Zero quantities here indicate that

component items have not yet been
let down to the work area and that the
kits are not yet ready to be built.
When the components have been replenished, the quantities that have been moved to the work
area are displayed in the In Work Area column:
Quantities indicate
the number of
component products
moved to the work
area.
A B O U T P R O C E S S I N G A S S E M B L Y O R D ER S 1 4 5
As kitters build kits and use the Pull Kitting function to report quantities built, the CanPull and
Built columns are updated accordingly:
Quantities still Number of

available for kits already
building kits. built.
UNDERSTANDING TYPES OF ASSEMBLY ORDERS
Although they are displayed in the Orders module, and use the same Packslip Report screen,
work orders are distinguishable from sales orders by their statuses, which are prefixed with
Assembly, and by the ASSEMBLY field, which is set to YES.
However, because not all work orders are processed in the same way, it is helpful to recognize
the different types of work orders that are supported by RADIO BEACON WMS and managed in
Web Dispatch. These include:
Build-to-stock work orders issued by the host system and downloaded into RADIO
BEACON WMS as work orders. These may follow any numbering convention determined
by your setup, but they are typically prefixed by an identifier that indicates that they are
work orders, such as ASM. They will not contain any customer information or ship-to
information in the Packslip Report. Unless your system is configured for automatic
allocation, you must allocate these orders, and you can apply all relevant actions to them.
Build-to-stock work orders manually entered by a handheld user through the RADIO
BEACON Build Kits function. These are numbered by the user at the order entry. You
process these orders in the same way as regular work orders.
Build-to-order work orders issued by the host system and downloaded into RADIO
BEACON as a combined work order and sales order pair. Usually these order pairs are
prefixed with some kind of code to indicate that they are part of a work order, such as
ASM. The assembly order is numbered the same as its corresponding sales order, but
with the extension .001. The work orders will contain customer information and ship-to
information in the Packslip Report. You process these orders in the same way as regular
work orders.
Build-to-order work orders issued by the host system and downloaded into RADIO
BEACON as sales orders (kit-on-the-fly). These orders are processed as regular sales
orders, as described in Understanding Types of Sales Orders on page 65.
ALLOCATING AND RE-ALLOCATING WORK

ORDERS
If your warehouse uses manual allocation, you can allocate any work orders with the status
ASSEMBLY-UNALLOCATED, at any time. You may have business rules in your warehouse
that determine when orders should be allocated, and in what sequence, such as orders that
belong to an Alert category, build-to-order orders for a particular customer, date required,
etc. Or you may simply allocate all orders as soon as they are downloaded and are displayed in
Web Dispatch. If background allocation is not enabled in your implementation, you will need
to manually re-allocate orders that are in ASSEMBLY-SHORT status.
If your system is configured for background allocation, you may not have to run the initial
allocation or any re-allocation. However, you may need to handle work orders that cannot be
successfully allocated automatically.
When a work order is allocated, the following occurs:
Stock is reserved from the specified work areas for the required products (if they are
available).
Order and line statuses are updated, as described in Understanding Work Order
A L L O C A T I N G AN D R E - A L L O C A T I N G W O R K O R D ER S 1 4 7
If component items are not in the specified work areas, replenishment requests are
generated.
Each order that requires replenishment is assigned to a separate replenishment group

identified by the work order number.
Assembly labels are printed.
In general, the process for allocating work orders consists of the following steps:
1. Select the order(s) you want to (re-)allocate. For procedures for selecting orders, see
Note: It is best not to group sales orders and work orders together in the same allocation
batch.
Allocate. The Allocate Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify allocation options for the order(s) you are (re-)allocating. More
information about these options is provided in Understanding and Modifying Work Order
Replenishment Options on page 149.
4. Perform the (re-)allocation, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For
5. Check the results of the (re-)allocation, as described in Understanding Work Order

6. For work orders that are held short, identify an appropriate method for handling them.
7. If necessary, unallocate previously allocated orders. For procedures, see Unallocating

Work Orders on page 155.
8. If necessary, re-allocate orders as many times as is necessary.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING WORK ORDER REPLENISHMENT

OPTIONS
When you use the Allocate action, the Allocation Settings window is displayed. The options in
this window are populated with default values that have been configured for your
groups of orders, if necessary. Note that these options only affect replenishment, if it is
required. Otherwise, the system will automatically allocate stock that is already available in the
required work area.
The options that affect replenishment for work orders are discussed in the following sections:
Understanding and Modifying Work Order Replenishment Method Options on

page 150.
Understanding and Modifying the Location Replenishment Option on page 151.
Understanding and Modifying the Zones Replenishment Options on page 153.
Understanding and Modifying Attribute Expiry Replenishment Options on page 152.
Understanding and Modifying the Assembly Label Printing Option on page 153
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING WORK ORDER REPLENISHMENT

METHOD OPTIONS
The action of allocating causes RADIO BEACON WMS to search the warehouses inventory and
match it against the items (products) on the order. By default, RADIO BEACON WMS allocates
product in the following sequence:
1. In order of packsize, from largest to smallest;
2. In order of date received, from oldest to most recent (FIFO);

ZONE
3. From zone to zone in ascending alphabetical order (if multiple zones are used);
4. From bin to bin in ascending alphanumerical sequence.
However, your system may be configured to use a different default method of allocation, such
as strict receipt dates (packsizes are ignored), or strict packsizes (receipt dates are ignored).
Finally, your system will be configured to use FIFO or LIFO by default, and to allocate larger
or smaller packsizes first; however, you can override the latter defaults for individual orders.
The various options for optimizing the allocation process for specific orders are summarized in
the following table.
Option Use to...

Stock Method Specify one of the following allocation methods:
FIFO (First In First Out) Stock will be allocated in sequence
by the date it was received, with oldest stock allocated first.
LIFO (Last In Last Out) Stock will be allocated in sequence by
the date it was received, with newest stock allocated first.
Deplete Smaller If not enough stock is available in the most efficient standard
Packsize packsizes, enable this option to allow smaller packsizes to be
allocated instead.
Reserve Minimum If a product has a minimum quantity defined in the database that
must be maintained in the warehouse, enable this option to
prevent stock from being allocated from the reserved quantity.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE LOCATION REPLENISHMENT

OPTION
LOC If your system supports multiple physical locations, you can use the Location option to specify
from which location(s) stock should be allocated.
Option Use to...

Location If RADIO BEACON WMS is managing multiple locations, specify
the physical location(s) from which stock may be replenished. If
the field is left blank, all locations will be included.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING ATTRIBUTE EXPIRY

REPLENISHMENT OPTIONS
If your warehouse uses expiry dates, lots, or other non-unique attributes, work orders may
ATT specify how products with attribute numbers, or specific expiry dates, should be handled. If the
orders do not specify this information, or if you want to override the settings included in the
orders, you can use the following options to control how products with these attributes should
be allocated.
Note: Products with unique attributes, such as serial numbers, cannot be allocated to work
orders.
Option Use to...

Attribute and Expiry Specify whether products with different non-unique attribute
Allocation values, expiry dates, and/or multiple packsizes can be mixed in
the same order. Select one of the following options:
Download values Use the settings specified in each order.
Single Attribute Expiry Products with different attribute

values, expiry dates, or packsizes can not be mixed in an order.
Multi Attribute/Expiry Products with different attribute values
and/or expiry dates can be mixed in an order, but only a single
packsize may be picked for an order.
Multi-Attribute/Unit Split Products with different attribute
values, expiry dates, and/or packsizes may be mixed in an order.
# Days to Expiry Exclude products from being allocated that will expire within a
certain number of days. Enter the minimum number of days
before the expiry date. For example, if you enter 365, this will
prevent any products that expire in less than 365 days from being
allocated to the order(s). 0 indicates that no minimum applies and
that products with any expiry date can be included for allocation.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE ZONES REPLENISHMENT

OPTIONS
ZONE If your system supports multiple zones, you can specify the zones which should be included
and/or excluded from work order replenishment.
Option Use to...

Include Zones for Specify zones from which product may be replenished for work
Kitting orders, by entering each desired zone, or leave blank to include
all zones. For example, entering ABC will result in RADIO
BEACON WMS searching only zones A, B, and C for available
product. Product may exist outside of those defined zones, but
RADIO BEACON WMS will not include those areas in its search
for products. The replenishment will proceed in alphabetical zone
sequence, regardless of the order of letters you specify, unless
you also select the By Zone Sequence option, described below.
By Zone Sequence Replenish from zone to zone in exact sequence you specify in the
Include Zones for Kitting fields. For example, if you specify
ACB as include zones, and you select this option, the
replenishment will use this sequence, rather than the normal ABC
alphabetical sequence.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING THE ASSEMBLY LABEL PRINTING

OPTION
You can specify the printer on which assembly labels should be printed, by using the following
option:
Option Use to...

Printer# Specify a printer on which assembly labels are to be printed. Enter the
number of a single physical printer on which all labels are to be printed
(for information, see Label and Document Printing in Overview of
RADIO BEACON WMS) for this group of work orders.
UNDERSTANDING WORK ORDER ALLOCATION RESULTS
have attempted to allocate will show their new statuses.
The following table summarizes the possible allocation results for work orders:
Status Explanation
ASSEMBLY - The order(s) have been completely filled from product that is already in
READY the work area defined for the order. Assembly labels are automatically
printed, so that kitters can begin building the kits.
ASSEMBLY - Component items that are required for the order(s) are not in the required
WAIT work area, but they are available in other bins in the warehouse.
REPLEN Replenishment requests are issued for the component items, and assembly
labels are automatically printed.
ASSEMBLY - The order(s) contain lines that require products that are currently
SHORT unavailable. Lines that can be filled are allocated, and stock is reserved for
them. However, unlike sales orders, work orders cannot be released as
shorted. You must either unallocate other orders to free up stock for the
short lines, or simply wait until the product is received into inventory,
before re-allocating the order(s).
UNALLOCATING WORK ORDERS

You most typically use the Unallocate action to free up stock from allocated or short work
orders so that it can be re-allocated to higher priority orders that were held because of missing
stock.
You can unallocate orders with any of the following statuses: ASSEMBLY - WAIT REPLEN,
ASSEMBLY - SHORT, ASSEMBLY - READY.
When you unallocate orders, the following occurs:
Stock that was reserved is unreserved.
Orders and lines are updated with the status ASSEMBLY -UNALLOCATED.
Note: Unallocating READY orders does not remove the stock from the work area. However,
that stock can be allocated to other work orders, and even to sales orders.
> To unallocate an order or group of work orders:
1. Select the order(s) you want to unallocate. For procedures for selecting orders, see
Unallocate. The Unallocate Settings window is displayed.
processed, they should be updated with the status of ASSEMBLY -UNALLOCATED.
4. Re-allocate the orders when appropriate, by following the instructions in Allocating and
Re-allocating Work Orders on page 147.
U NA L L O C A T I N G W O R K O R D ER S 1 5 5
CANCELLING WORK ORDERS

If you need to cancel a work order, you can use the Nuke action to do so, for work orders in any
status. However, unlike sales orders, work orders cannot be expedited by nuking; that is, you
cannot short or automatically pick a work order. If orders are waiting for replenishment from
overstock, the replenishment requests are cleared may be cancelled and the stock unallocated.
However, once component items have been moved to the work area, the Nuke action only
serves to cancel the order; it cannot unallocate or force the component items to be picked.
When you Nuke orders, the following occurs:
If the order is not deleted, it is assigned a wave number of 997.
Depending on the options you select, orders are marked SHIPPED & UPLOADED and
removed from the Web Dispatch display; or completely deleted from RADIO BEACON
WMS and removed from the Web Dispatch display.
The general process for cancelling work orders consists of the following steps:
1. Select the order(s) you want to cancel. For procedures for selecting orders, see General
2. Right-click anywhere on the screen you are using, and from the pop-up menu, select Nuke.
The Nuke Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify nuking options for the order(s). More information about these options
is provided in Understanding and Modifying Work Order Nuke Options on page 157.
4. Perform the nuke, and refresh the display in the Orders summary screen. For procedures,
see General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44.
5. Check the results of the nuke. The order(s) should be removed from the Web Dispatch
display.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING WORK ORDER NUKE OPTIONS
When you use the Nuke action, the Nuke Settings window is displayed. The options in this
window will be populated with default values that have been configured for your
implementation. However, you will need to modify these options to handle work orders
appropriately. The options that affect work orders are discussed in the following sections:
Understanding and Modifying Order Handling Options below.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING ORDER HANDLING OPTIONS
Once kits have been built, you cannot use the Nuke action to unpick them. Any kits that have
been built will remain built, and the component items depleted. Similarly, you cannot pick
kits that have not yet been built; you can only leave the component items in the work areas to
be reallocated to other work orders. Thus, the only options that are valid are as follows:
Option Use to...

Ship Mark already-built kits as built. If the Show Actual Qty option is
also selected (see Understanding and Modifying Host System
Reporting Options on page 158), the quantity of kits built will be
uploaded to the host system.
Cancel & Unallocate Unallocate the remaining component items from the order and
make them available for other orders.
C A NC E L L I N G W O R K O R D ER S 1 5 7
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING HOST SYSTEM REPORTING

OPTIONS
You use the Report to Host and Backorder options to determine how the order(s) will be
uploaded to the host system.
Option Use to...

Show Qty Picked Pass the actual kits built and components depleted to the host
system.
Nuke & Delete Completely remove this order from the RADIO BEACON
WMS system and do not report anything to the host system.
4 PROCESSING PACKAGING
PACK
ORDERS
ABOUT PROCESSING PACKAGING ORDERS

Packaging orders are similar to other types of work orders in that they are viewed in the Orders
module, order details are viewed in the Packslip Report screen, and so on. However, although
the same pop-up menus and allocation screens appear for work orders in Web Dispatch, most
of these options do not actually apply to packaging orders.
One major difference with packaging orders is that you never need to allocate them. RADIO
BEACON WMS automatically allocates a packaging order once it is created; if there are not
enough units to be allocated to the order, the order cannot be created. This chapter discusses the
different types of packaging orders, the actions, options, and statuses that apply to them, and
special considerations you need to take into account when processing packaging orders. Before
continuing, you are advised to review the chapter Understanding RADIO BEACON WMS
Processes in the manual Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS.
The following sections provide conceptual background information on working with

packaging orders:
Understanding Types of Packaging Orders on page 159.
Understanding Packaging Order Actions and Statuses on page 160.
UNDERSTANDING TYPES OF PACKAGING ORDERS
Although they are displayed in the Orders module, and use the same Packslip Report screen,
packaging orders are distinguishable from sales orders by the ASSEMBLY field, which is set
to YES, and from other assembly orders by their statuses, which are prefixed with PKG.
1 5 9
However, because not all packaging orders are processed in the same way, it is helpful to
recognize the different types of packaging orders that are supported by RADIO BEACON and
managed in Web Dispatch. These are:
Packaging orders created through the Packaging Report or Multi-Pack Packaging Report.
You create these orders for the packaging candidates that RADIO BEACON identifies as
being ready to be packaged into formal packsizes, based on various criteria you can
specify, such as the monthly sales velocity, days on hand, replenishment zones, and so on.
Only the products that meet the criteria you specify, and that are known to have the
required inventory available in overstock, are selected. Procedures for creating packaging
orders from the Packaging reports are provided in Creating Packaging Orders on
page 162.
Packaging orders created through the Order Entry function. If your system uses the Order
O/E Entry feature, you can create packaging orders for any product (defined as a packaging
item), in any packsize, in any quantity provided that the required inventory is actually
available in overstock bins. The Packslip Report for this type of packaging order shows
simply the line item information, without any velocity or days on hand information. The
process for creating this type of packaging order is described in Entering Packaging
Orders on page 302 of Chapter 9, Entering Orders.
UNDERSTANDING PACKAGING ORDER ACTIONS AND STATUSES
You can apply the following actions to packaging orders:
Package (available from the Packaging and Multi-Pack Packaging report screens only)
Allocate (to reallocate only)
Unallocate
Nuke
Note that the Wave, Unwave, Suspend, Unsuspend, and Ship actions do not apply to packaging
orders.
1 6 0 CHAPTER 4 P R O C E S S I NG P A C K AG I N G O R D E R S
The following sections provide an overview of these actions, the stage in the processing cycle
at which you normally perform them, and the sections in this manual in which they are
described. For an overview of packaging order process steps, see Understanding Process
Steps on page 26.
ABOUT THE PACKAGE ACTION
You use the Package action to do the following:

this status...
Create packaging orders for NOT RELEASED Creating Packaging
candidates identified by the system. Orders on page 162.

this status...
Re-allocate packaging orders that PKG - READY TO Allocating and Re-
were unallocated. The order will move PRINT allocating Work Orders
back into the status PKG - READY in Chapter 3,
PKG - BEING BUILT
TO PRINT or PKG - BEING BUILT. Processing Assembly
Orders. The conditions
and options that apply to
work orders also apply
to packaging orders.
A B O U T P R O CE S S I N G P A C K A G I N G O R D ER S 1 6 1
You use the Unallocate action to do the following:

this status...
Unallocate previously allocated PKG - READY TO Unallocating Work
packaging orders and free up reserved PRINT Orders in Chapter 3,
stock. You should only do this in Processing Assembly
PKG - BEING BUILT
exceptional circumstances. The order Orders. The conditions
will move into the status ASSEMBLY and options that apply to
- UNALLOCATED. work orders also apply

this status...
Cancel an order and, optionally, delete any Cancelling Work
it from RADIO BEACON. Orders in Chapter 3,
Processing Assembly
Orders. The conditions
and options that apply to
work orders also apply
CREATING PACKAGING ORDERS

The first step in creating packaging orders is to generate a Packaging Report. Generating and
using the Packaging Report is described in Working with the Packaging Reports.
Once you have generated the Packaging Report, you can select the products for which you
actually want to create packaging orders. The process for creating the packaging orders is
described in Generating the Packaging Orders on page 167.
WORKING WITH THE PACKAGING REPORTS
Each night, the Calculate Demand Requirements function is run in RFBase. This function
examines the sales of every packaging item for the previous month and determines the daily
average number of picks, or velocity, per packsize for every product in the warehouse. The data
used to calculate the product/packsize velocity will depend on your configuration. The time
period of sales data can be one of the following:
The total sales of the entire previous month. In this case, the velocity calculation will only
actually be updated on the first day of each new month.
The total sales of the past rolling thirty days. In this case, the velocity calculation will be
updated every day.
In addition, the sales data may be based on one of the following:
Actual packsizes picked. In this case, the velocity calculation is based on the packsizes
which were actually picked and shipped to fulfill sales orders. For example, in a
warehouse that uses formal packsizes of 25 and 100, the velocity will be determined from
the actual number of 25-packs and 100-packs that were sold. If the number of units sold
totals 6025, but 1001 packs of 25 and 40 packs of 100 were sold, the monthly velocity for
25-packs would be 101, and the monthly velocity of 100-packs would be 40.
Potential packsizes picked. In this case, the velocity calculation is based the packsizes
which should have been picked, assuming an algorithm that judges the largest formal
packsizes to be the most efficient. The velocity calculation takes the total number of units
picked and divides it by the most efficient packsizes, from largest to smallest. Thus, for
example, if the packsizes are 25 and 100, and 6025 units were sold, the monthly velocity
for 25-packs would be 1, and the monthly velocity of 100-packs would be 60.
Once the monthly velocity for each packsize has been calculated, the daily velocity is then
obtained by simply dividing by 30. For example, if the monthly velocity of 100-packs should
be 60, the daily velocity is 2 packs per day. Finally, the number of expected days on hand for
each packsize is calculated by examining the current inventory of each packsize and dividing
this quantity by the daily velocity. For example, if 2 packs of 100 are expected to be sold every
day, and there are currently 50 packs of 100 in inventory, then the expected number of days on
hand for this packsize is 25.
C R E AT I N G P AC K A G I N G O R D ER S 1 6 3
Based on the days-on-hand values that you specify, the Packaging Report generates a list of all
products in overstock that could be candidates for repackaging into each formal packsize. For
each product, the Packaging Report also identifies the quantity of packs required in order to
meet the expected demand for the current month. When you generate the Packaging Report,
you can limit the products/packsizes according to those with less than a specific number of
days worth of inventory, and/or to those stored in a particular zone.
Once you have generated the Packaging Report, you can also view the Multi-Pack Packaging
Report, which lists a subset of the candidates found in the Packaging Report, by limiting the
display to only the products that have packaging candidates in more than one packsize.
> To generate the Packaging Report:
2. Click the Inventory tab to display the Inventory Reports screen.
3. Next to the Packaging Report selection, in the Days on Hand field, optionally enter the
maximum number of days for which product should be available in a given packsize. For
example, if you only want to list products/packsizes that have less than 10 days worth of
inventory, enter 10. If you want to list all packaging items, regardless of their inventory
levels, leave the field blank.
4. Optionally, in the Replenishment Zones field, enter each zone (containing overstock
bins) from which you would like to allocate product for packaging. To enter more than one
zone, simply enter each letter representing each zone (do not leave any spaces). To list
products that are stored in all zones, leave the field blank.
5. If you want to generate a new report, based on the latest velocity calculations, select the
Create New Report checkbox. If you simply want to display the last-generated report,
leave the box unchecked.
6. When ready to generate the report, click Go. The candidates for packaging table is
displayed, based on the criteria you specified.
Pivot by number of days on hand or by

velocity (per month).
7. Optionally, select an alternate pivot, or apply a filter, if any are defined for your system.
For information on using pivots and filters, see Using the Orders Summary Screens on
page 14.
8. Select the packaging candidates you want to see in detail by clicking on the underlined
number corresponding to the desired number of days on hand, or desired velocity level.
The list of packaging candidates is displayed.
9. Optionally, to view only the items that have packaging candidates in more than one
packsize, exit the Packaging Report, and from the Inventory Reports screen, next to the
Multi-Pack Packaging Report selection, click Go.
The packaging candidates list in both the Packaging and Multi-Pack Packaging Reports
consists of the following parameters:
Parameter Explanation
Units_PVE The total number of units available for packaging in the
selected zone(s).
Packages Available The number of packs already packaged into the indicated
formal packsize, that are available (unallocated) in the
warehouse.
Units Total The total number of units available for packaging in the
warehouse (the packageable units in the selected zone, plus
the available units already packaged in the warehouse).
Days on Hand The number of days for which the system expects there to be
inventory available in this packsize, based on the product
velocity.
Velocity The number of packs in this packsize that are expected to be
sold this month.
Can Build The total number of packs in this packsize, that can be built
from units available in the selected zone(s).
Pull Eaches The number of units remaining to be packaged, in order to
meet the velocity requirements for this packsize, after the
total number of units in the selected zone(s) are packaged.
Note: If this number is negative, it means that there are
already more packages available in this packsize than are
actually needed to meet this months velocity requirements.
GENERATING THE PACKAGING ORDERS
Once you have generated the list of items/packsizes that are appropriate for packaging at this
time, you can further select the items from the list in either the Packaging Report or Multi-Pack
Packaging Report to generate the actual packaging orders. When you create a packaging order,
the following occurs:
The order is created with the status PKG - READY TO PRINT, and assigned a four-digit
number in sequence, with the prefix defined in your configuration, e.g. PACK0004.
A new work area matching the order number is automatically created and assigned to the
order.
The inventory is allocated from the selected zone, and replenishment requests are
generated.
> To generate a packaging order or group of packaging orders:
1. From the Packaging or Multi-Pack Packaging report screen, select the item(s) you want to
package. For procedures for selecting items/orders, see General Procedures for
Processing Orders on page 44.
Package. The Package Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify the packaging options for the item(s) you are packaging. More
information about these options are provided in Understanding and Modifying Package
Options on page 168.
General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44. When all items have been
processed, the orders should appear, with the status PKG - READY TO PRINT.
5. If necessary, unallocate and re-allocate the order(s) as appropriate.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING PACKAGE OPTIONS
When you use the Package action, the Package Settings window is displayed.
The options in this screen may be populated with default values that have been configured for
your implementation. However, you can modify the default settings for particular orders or
groups of orders, if necessary.
Option Use to...

Maximum # Days Specify the maximum number of days worth of inventory
that should be built for this packsize, based on the packsizes
velocity. For example, if the monthly velocity of the product/
packsize is 18, specifying 30 in this field will order 18 packs
of the product; specifying 15 in this field, will order 9 packs
of the product, and specifying 60 days in this field will order
36 packs of this product.
Quantity Override Specify the total number of units which you want to
repackage, regardless of the packsize, velocity, or days on
hand of the item indicated in the candidate record. Normally
you will only use this option in exceptional circumstances.
UNDERSTANDING THE PACKAGING ORDER PACKSLIP SCREEN
Once you have generated a packaging order, the Packslip Report screen provides details about
the order and the options you selected when creating it. In addition to the Assembly Info,
which shows you the status of components in the work area (for information, see
Understanding Work Order Assembly Info on page 145), the line details describe the criteria
by which the order quantities were determined.
Line number Order information
Packaging item Product to be packaged
Since a packaging order cannot be created unless the product to be packaged is actually
available in the required quantities, the product lines always show the overstock bins from
which the product is to be replenished, in blue. A series of comment lines display the following
order information:
Line Description Explanation

Number
.001 Days On Hand The number of days the product is expected to be on
hand in this packsize, based on the current velocity
calculations.
Line Description Explanation

Number
.002 Velocity The number of packs in this packsize that are expected
to be sold in the current month, based on the current
velocity calculations.
.003 On Hand The current number of packs in inventory in this
packsize.
.004 Max Days On Hand The number of days on hand you selected when you
generated the order.
.005 # Cartons The number of packs that are required in this packsize to
meet the current months demand. This value is obtained
by multiplying the daily velocity for this packsize by the
maximum number of days on hand you selected, and
then subtracting the of packs in this packsize already
existing in inventory.
.007 Total Quantity-To- The number of packs to build (this is the # Cartons
Build value rounded up to the nearest integer).
5 PROCESSING PURCHASE
ORDERS AND RETURNS
ABOUT PROCESSING PURCHASE ORDERS

Receiving details and report screens allow you to process purchase orders, transfer purchase
orders and non-P.O. receipts by applying actions to them. These actions take the orders through
the processing cycle described throughout The Warehouse Process Cycle in Overview of
RADIO BEACON WMS. You may wish to review that chapter before continuing.
The following sections provide conceptual background information on working with purchase
orders:
Understanding Purchase Order Actions and Statuses on page 172.
Understanding the Purchase Order Report Screen on page 173.
Understanding Types of Purchase Orders on page 175.
Additional Purchase Order Processing Functions on page 176.
1 7 1
UNDERSTANDING PURCHASE ORDER ACTIONS AND STATUSES
The actions that appear on the pop-up menu in the Receiving details and report screens are
used to process purchase orders and move them through the warehouse cycle:
Release Order
Complete PO
Delete PO
The following sections provide an overview of the actions that you can apply to purchase
orders, the stage in the processing cycle at which you normally perform them, and the sections
in this chapter in which they are described. For an overview of purchase order process steps,
see Understanding Process Steps on page 26.
ABOUT THE RELEASE ORDER ACTION
You use the Release Order action to do the following:

this status...
O/E If your system is configured to require APPROVED Releasing Purchase
it, release purchase orders you have Orders on page 177.
entered through Web Dispatch for
receipt into the warehouse.
172 CHAPTER 5 PROCESSING PURCHASE ORDERS AND RETURNS

ABOUT THE COMPLETE PO ACTION
You use the Complete PO action to do the following:

this status...
Close purchase orders and upload the BEING RECEIVED Closing Purchase
receipt confirmations to the host Orders on page 178.
system.
ABOUT THE DELETE PO ACTION
You use the Delete PO action to do the following:

this status...
Cancel a purchase order and delete it any Cancelling or
from the database. Expediting Purchase
Orders on page 179.
Expedite an order by bypassing any Cancelling or
normal processing steps. Expediting Purchase
Orders on page 179.
UNDERSTANDING THE PURCHASE ORDER REPORT SCREEN
The PO/Manifest Report screen tells you all the details about an order, and is helpful for
monitoring and troubleshooting a purchase order from the moment it is downloaded, to the
time when you or a receiver need to close it.
A B O U T P R O C E S SI N G P U R C H A S E O R D ER S 1 7 3
In addition to order statuses, the lines on purchase orders are also marked with statuses, which
are displayed on PO Report screens once the orders begin to be processed. If you are closing
purchase orders in Web Dispatch, you will want to view the line results, so that you can see if
the purchase orders have been completely received or not.
Line number Product ordered for that line Line status
Depending on your configuration, line statuses may be marked with the following codes:
Status Explanation
Indicator
none The line has not yet been received.
S The line has been received complete or the line has been received short,
but has been marked as complete by the receiver or by the dispatcher with
the Delete PO action (see Understanding and Modifying Unreceived
Goods Options on page 181).
I The line has been received short and has been marked as incomplete by the
receiver or by the dispatcher with the Delete PO action.
B The line has been received short and has been marked as requiring the
missing items to be back ordered by the receiver or by the dispatcher with
the Delete PO action.
Note that, if you have the appropriate permissions, you can also directly add, delete, and edit an
order line from this screen, if changes need to be made to the order since it was downloaded.
For information on editing orders, see Editing or Deleting Purchase Order Line Details on
page 265.

UNDERSTANDING TYPES OF PURCHASE ORDERS
Because not all purchase orders are processed in the same way, it is helpful to recognize the
different types of sales orders that are supported by RADIO BEACON and managed in Web
Dispatch. These include:
Purchase orders issued by the host system and downloaded into RADIO BEACON WMS.
These follow any numbering convention determined by your setup. They will show vendor
information in the PO Report.
Back orders automatically created by the host system. These follow the numbering
convention determined by your host system.
Back orders that are automatically created by RADIO BEACON for previous purchase orders
that were received short. These are numbered in the same way as the original orders from
which they are generated, with the extension -n where n indicates the number of the back
order (e.g. 1, 2, etc.).
Purchase orders entered through the Web Dispatch Order Entry function. These are
O/E automatically numbered in sequence, with 10 digits, starting with 0000000001, or they
may be numbered by the user at order entry. Depending on your configuration, you may
need to release these orders before they can be received.
Return materials authorizations (RMAs) downloaded from the host system. These may
follow any numbering convention determined by your setup.
RMAs entered through the Web Dispatch. These are automatically numbered in sequence,
RMA with 6 digits, starting with 000001, and prefixed with an R. The PO Report screen for
these orders also displays the original sales order number against which the items were
shipped, the customer, reasons for the return, and various other handling information.
Non-PO receipts. If your warehouse allows non-PO receiving, these orders are numbered
by the user at receiving. The PO Report screen for these receipts will not show any vendor
information, but will show the miscellaneous adjustments that were created for each
product received, as this is how these receipts are actually processed. Each adjustment is
identified with the code RV indicating that it was a non-PO receipt, and the inventory
adjustment listed as a plus, indicating that the inventory was increased by the displayed
quantity.
A B O U T P R O C E S SI N G P U R C H A S E O R D ER S 1 7 5
Transfer purchase orders are used to receive goods into the destination warehouse, when
using the warehouse transfer function to transfer products from one warehouse site to
LOC
another, via a transit site. Transfer purchase orders are, for the most part, processed
identically to regular purchase orders from the perspective of the dispatcher and the
warehouse staff. These orders are easy to distinguish in Web Dispatch by the TRANS
prefix for all process steps.
ADDITIONAL PURCHASE ORDER PROCESSING FUNCTIONS
Additional functions that are available in Web Dispatch for processing purchase orders include:
RECV
Creating container references for multiple purchase orders. For information, see Creating
Container References on page 182.
RMA Entering returned materials authorizations (RMAs) against uploaded sales orders. For
information, see Entering RMAs on page 186.
Receive purchase orders or containers with Web Dispatch rather than using the handheld.
For information, see Receiving a Purchase Order in Web Dispatch on page 188.
Create a Transfer Purchase Order in Web Dispatch against a purchase order/container.

LOC When creating a transfer purchase order, you specify a transit warehouse, instead of
specific bins, into which products are to be received. For information, see Creating
Transfer Purchase Orders in Web Dispatch on page 190.

RELEASING PURCHASE ORDERS

If you create purchase orders in Web Dispatchs Order Entry function (for information, see
O/E Entering Purchase Orders on page 297), your system may be configured to initially assign
them the status APPROVED If this is the case, before these orders can actually be received by
warehouse staff, the dispatcher must release them.
When you release purchase orders, the following occurs:
Orders are placed into the status of NOT RECEIVED.
Orders are made available to warehouse staff for receipt.
The process for releasing orders consists of the following steps:
Release Order. The Release Order Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, to print a Crystal Report of the purchase order, enable the Print Report check
box.
4. Optionally, enter a handle for the order(s) you are releasing.
5. Perform the release, and refresh the display in the Receiving summary screen. For
have been processed, they should be updated with the status of NOT RECEIVED.
R EL E A SI N G P U R C H A S E O R D ER S 1 7 7
CLOSING PURCHASE ORDERS

Your warehouse will have a policy on who should close purchase orders once they have been
received: the dispatcher or the receivers. In many warehouses, receivers will simply close
purchase orders as they receive them. In other warehouses, it may be the dispatchers job to
close all the purchase orders in a batch at the end of the day.
When you close purchase orders, the following occurs:
Receipt confirmations are uploaded to the host system.
The orders are made unavailable to warehouse staff for further processing.
Note: Be sure that all lines on a purchase order with the status BEING RECEIVED have
been received before closing it. To verify the receipt of all line items, simply view the
report screen for the purchase order, and be sure that all lines have a status recorded
for them (see Understanding the Purchase Order Report Screen on page 173). You
may also wish to run one of the various Receiving reports to quickly see the status of
POs; for information, see Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221.
> To close purchase orders:
Complete PO. The Complete PO Settings window is displayed.
3. Perform the completion, and refresh the display in the Receiving summary screen. For
have been processed, they should be removed from the display (or marked with the status
READY TO UPLOAD, if your system is not configured to automatically upload receipts
to the host).

CANCELLING OR EXPEDITING PURCHASE ORDERS

Deleting a purchase order is an exceptional way of handling a purchase order in Web Dispatch
at any point. Deleting can actually accomplish two different functions for different
circumstances:
The first implementation of delete cancels the purchase order and removes it from
RADIO BEACON WMS; it is used in the case where you want to cancel a purchase order
and it is too late or inefficient to cancel it from the host system.
The second implementation of delete actually expedites the purchase order by bypassing
all of the normal RADIO BEACON WMS process steps, and reporting the quantity of
product received to the host system. You may want to use this option to process rush or
urgent items for immediate outbound shipment, or to handle any purchase orders manually
rather than by having them pass through the normal receiving and putty steps.
Note: Your system will have configured the Delete action to either cancel or expedite orders
by default. If you need to handle an order differently, be sure to modify the
appropriate deletion options, as described below.
When you delete purchase orders, the following occurs:
Depending on the options you select, purchase orders are received and marked READY
TO UPLOAD (in most implementations, this status is not displayed, as receipt
confirmations are automatically uploaded to the host system), or orders are cancelled and
deleted from RADIO BEACON WMS and removed from the Web Dispatch display.
C A N CE L L I N G O R E X P E D I T I N G P U R C H A S E O R D ER S 1 7 9
The general process for cancelling or expediting consists of the following steps:
Delete PO. The Delete PO Settings window is displayed.
3. Optionally, modify deletion options for the order(s). More information about these options
are provided in Understanding and Modifying Delete Options on page 180.
4. Perform the deletion, and refresh the display in the Receiving summary screen. For
have been processed, they should be removed from the display (or marked with the status
READY TO UPLOAD, if your system is not configured to automatically upload receipts
to the host).
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING DELETE OPTIONS
When you use the Delete PO action, the Delete PO Settings window is displayed.
The options in this screen will be populated with default values that have been configured for
your implementation. However, you can modify any of the default settings for particular orders
or groups of orders, if necessary.

All the options available in this screen are discussed in the following sections:
Understanding and Modifying Unreceived Goods Options on page 181.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING HOST SYSTEM

REPORTING OPTIONS
You use the Report to Host options to determine how the order(s) will be uploaded to the host
system. If you want to completely cancel the order(s), you will normally want to delete the
order(s) from RADIO BEACON WMS. If you want to expedite the order(s), you will normally
want to upload receipt confirmations to the host system.
Option Use to...

Upload Pass the actual quantities received to the host system.
Delete Completely remove this order from RADIO BEACON
WMS and do not report anything to the host system.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING UNRECEIVED GOODS OPTIONS
You use the Unreceived Goods options to determine how unreceived items on the order(s) are
to be handled. If you want to completely cancel the order(s), you will normally want to simply
mark all goods as complete. If you are expediting the order(s), you will normally want to mark
the unreceived goods according to the appropriate handling method used by your warehouse.
Option Use to...

Mark as Complete Mark the order as complete. No further processing is needed.
Mark as Incomplete Mark the order as incomplete, but do not automatically issue a
back order. Unreceived goods will be handled manually.
Mark as Backordered Automatically create a back order for unreceived goods.
Note: Your system must be configured to allow RADIO BEACON
WMS to create back orders for your warehouse.
Receive and Add Receive the unreceived goods into inventory.
C A N CE L L I N G O R E X P E D I T I N G P U R C H A S E O R D ER S 1 8 1
CREATING CONTAINER REFERENCES

Many warehouses normally receive goods by containers containing multiple purchase orders.
RECV Often the container reference number will be included in the purchase orders downloaded from
the host system. However, you can also use Web Dispatch to create a container reference
number for multiple orders. This will allow receivers to receive all of these orders in a wave,
according to the container reference number, rather than according to each individual purchase
order number.
When you create a container, you can add orders from different vendors to the same container.
You do not need to add all lines or all quantities on a selected purchase order to the container.
Instead, you can create containers consisting of only selected lines and even partial quantities
from selected purchase orders. If you or your receiving staff close purchase orders that are still
awaiting receipt of remaining lines on other containers, a back order for the remaining lines
will automatically be created and downloaded to RADIO BEACON WMS for receipt.
Note: If you add the same lines or quantities from one purchase order to multiple containers,
the lines are only actually added to the last container to which you add them and will
automatically be removed from containers to which you added them previously.
> To create a container reference:
2. Click the Receiving tab to display the Receiving Reports screen.

3. Next to the Create a Container selection, click Go. The Create a Container screen is
displayed.
4. Optionally, in the Container field, enter a number for this container, or leave the field
blank to have RADIO BEACON WMS automatically create the container number for you.
5. Optionally enter any required information in the Vessel No, Date Left Port, Status and
Est. Arrive Date fields.
6. From the Vendor drop-down list, select a vendor from which you want to select purchase
orders. When you select a vendor, the Available Orders field is displayed, containing a
drop-down list of purchase orders for the selected vendor.
C R E A T I N G C O N T A I N ER R E F E R EN C E S 1 8 3
7. From the Available Orders drop-down list, select a purchase order containing the line(s)
you want to add to the container. The order details display.
Any previously received quantities display in the Qty Received field.
8. To select lines to add to the container, do one of the following:
To select all lines and quantities for this order, click Select All.
To select a partial quantity of a line, in the Qty Split field, enter the quantity you want.
To deselect a line, in the Qty Split field, enter 0.

9. When you are ready to add the selected lines to the container, click Add Selected. The
selected line items appear in the Result portion of the screen.
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 to select additional vendors, orders and/or line items to add to the
container.
11. Click Create Container. If you left the Container Number field blank, you are prompted
to confirm whether you want RADIO BEACON WMS to create the container number for
you. Click OK.
The container is created, the container reference number and contents of the container are
displayed.
> To view information for a container you have created:
1. In the Reports module, click the Receiving tab to display the Receiving Reports screen.
C R E A T I N G C O N T A I N ER R E F E R EN C E S 1 8 5
2. Do one of the following:
Next to the View Container selection, in the Container field, enter the container
number, and click Go.
Next to the Container Lookup selection, in the PO or Vendor fields, enter the PO
and/or vendor number, respectively, for the container you want to look up, and click
Go. A list of containers for the selected vendor or PO is displayed.
The container information is displayed, as described in View Container Report on

page 228.
ENTERING RMAS
If your warehouse uses returned materials authorizations (RMAs) to allow customers to return
RMA products, you can use the RMA feature to automatically generate purchase orders for the
returned items, with the appropriate RMA codes. You can only create RMAs against sales
orders that have already been uploaded.
Your configuration will include a number of reason codes for which an RMA may be issued,
such as product damage, defects, and so on. Each of these reasons will also determine
additional options, such as whether a restocking charge applies, the customer should be
credited, replacement items should be shipped, and whether the customer should be re-
invoiced.

> To enter an RMA:
1. To open the Packslip Report screen for the uploaded sales order for which you want to
create the RMA, do any of the following:
In the Reports module, click the Picking tab to display the Picking Reports screen,
and next to the Packslip Report entry, in the Packslip field, enter the number of the
sales order, and click Go.
In the Reports module, click the Picking tab to display the Picking Reports screen,
and next to the Uploaded Shipments entry, enter the date on which the order was
shipped in the Start Date and End Date fields, and click Go. From the Uploaded
Shipments Reports screen, click the order number.
From the Customer Report screen, in the list of completed orders, under the Packslip
heading, click the order number.
2. In the Packslip Report screen, click the RMA button. The RMA Issue screen is displayed,
with the line items from the sales order, and the original quantities shipped.
E N T E R I N G R M A S 1 8 7
3. Next to each line containing product to be returned, from the Reason drop-down list,
select a reason for which the product is being returned. The Restock Fee, Credit Now, and
Re-Invoice fields are automatically populated, according to the defaults that are defined in
your configuration for each reason.
Note: Any lines for which you do not provide a reason are not included in the RMA.
4. Optionally, if the quantity to be returned for any line is less than the original quantity
ordered, in the Qty to Return field, enter the actual quantity to be returned.
5. Optionally, if you need to modify the Restock Fee, Credit Now, and Re-invoice fields,
enter the appropriate values next to the appropriate lines.
6. Optionally, if new items need to be shipped, in the Re-ship Qty field, enter the quantity to
be shipped next to the appropriate lines.
7. In the Return Properties section, optionally, enter any special instructions for this order
and any of the payment on delivery or shipping and handling options.
8. Click Confirm to complete the order. A new purchase order is created and displayed. The
order is also displayed in the Receiving summary screen with the status NOT RECEIVED.
RECEIVING A PURCHASE ORDER IN

WEB DISPATCH
The Quick Purchase Order Completion function allows you to receive products on a purchase
order or container with Web Dispatch, rather than using the handheld. This may be useful in
situations where handhelds are not available. After the purchase order/container is received
manually, use Quick Purchase Order Completion to record the bins to which the products and
quantities were received. Each line in the purchase order must be received to a single bin, i.e.,
you cant split the quantity received into different bins using Quick Purchase Order
Completion.

You can complete purchase orders that are in NOT RECEIVED or BEING RECEIVED status.
> To receive a transfer purchase order/container in Web Dispatch:
1. Go to the Reports module and click the Receiving tab.
2. Next to the Quick Purchase Order Completion selection do one of the following:
In the PO field, enter the purchase order number, or
RECV In the Container field enter the container number of a container reference created
with the Create a Container function (or downloaded from the host).
3. Click Go. The Quick Purchase Order Completion screen for the order is displayed.
Any items were previously received are displayed in the Qty Received field.
4. In the Packsize field, enter the packsize in which the product arrived.
5. In the Qty Received field, enter the actual quantity you want to receive now. You can
receive a partial quantity or over-receive a quantity greater than the ordered quantity.
R E C E I V I N G A P U R C H A S E O R D E R I N W E B D I SP AT C H 1 8 9
6. In the Bin Label field, enter the bin into which the product was received. Your system may
have been pre-configured with a default for this bin.
7. Click Confirm when you are satisfied that the information you entered is correct.
When you click Confirm, the purchase order is completed. Receipt confirmations (or stock
move transaction in the case of transfer purchase orders) are uploaded to the host system, and
the order is unavailable to warehouse staff for further processing. The purchase order is
removed from the display (or marked with the status READY TO UPLOAD, if your system is
not configured to automatically upload receipts to the host).
CREATING TRANSFER PURCHASE ORDERS IN

WEB DISPATCH
Quick Purchase Order Completion can be used to receive the products in a purchase order or
LOC container to a transit warehouse, rather than to specific bins in the warehouse. When you use
Quick Purchase Order Completion in this way, it creates a transfer purchase order, against
which the products can be received later in detail, without creating duplicate receipt
confirmations for the host.
You can create transfer purchase orders for purchase orders that are in NOT RECEIVED or
BEING RECEIVED status.
> To create a transfer purchase:
1. Go to the Reports module and click the Receiving tab.
2. Next to the Quick Purchase Order Completion selection do one of the following:
In the PO field, enter the purchase order number, or
RECV In the Container field enter the container number of a container reference created
with the Create a Container function (or downloaded from the host).

3. Click Go. The Quick Purchase Order Completion screen for the order is displayed.
4. In the Packsize field, enter the packsize in which the product arrived.
5. The Qty Received field, the actual quantity you want to receive now. You can receive a
partial quantity or over-receive a quantity greater than the ordered quantity.
6. Leave the Bin Label field empty.
7. Select the Create Transfer PO checkbox.
8. In the To Warehouse field, enter the destination warehouse.
9. Click Confirm when you are satisfied that the information you entered is correct
When you click Confirm, the original purchase order(s) is ready to be uploaded to the host. A
new transfer purchase order is created and displays in the Receiving module in TRANSNOT
RECEIVED status.
C R E A T I N G T R A N S F E R P U R C H A S E O R D E R S I N W E B D I S P A T C H 1 9 1

6 USING INCIDENTS
ABOUT INCIDENTS
Incidents are used as communication tools within the warehouse to notify Web Dispatch users
of any issue regarding a customer or order, to alert them to problems, or assign them tasks
which must be followed up on. Typically, incidents are used by customer service
representatives or other front-office users to communicate with the Web dispatcher. In a
warehouse with several dispatchers, they may be used by one dispatcher to assign tasks to
another. Creating incidents is discussed in Creating and Assigning Incidents on page 193.
Once an incident has been assigned to a dispatcher, it is automatically displayed in his/her

instance of Web Dispatch, and will remain displayed until s/he deals with it in an appropriate
manner, by re-assigning it, resolving it, or closing it. Handling incidents is discussed in
Viewing and Responding to Incidents on page 196.
CREATING AND ASSIGNING INCIDENTS

You use the Incidents module to create incidents for orders, customers, vendors, and even
products, if necessary. You can only assign an incident to one user at a time; the user must be
configured by the system to be assigned incidents. The user who is assigned the incident must
address it or re-assign it to another user. To create an incident, follow the procedure in
Creating an Incident on page 194.
You can also use the Incidents module to view a list of all incidents you have created and
assigned; follow the procedure in Viewing Incidents You Have Assigned on page 195.
1 9 3
CREATING AN INCIDENT
> To create and assign an incident:
1. From the navigation bar, click Incidents to open the Incidents module.
2. From the Incidents summary, click New Incident. A new incident is opened in the Incident
Editor, with the status OPEN.
1 9 4 CHAPTER 6 U SI NG I N C I D E N T S
3. Enter information in any or all of the following optional fields:
Field Enter...
Product The product name or number, if relevant.
Customer The customer number, if not already populated.
Number
Vendor The vendor number, if not already populated.
Number
Packslip The sales order number, if not already populated.
PO# The purchase order number, if not already populated.
Description A brief description of the issue.
Notes A more detailed description of the issue.
Client Name The client/company to which this incident applies (only used for
multi-company or 3PL implementations).
Priority Text or code identifying the priority of the incident, e.g. high, 1,
etc.
4. From the Assigned To drop-down list, select the name of the user to whom you want to
assign the incident.
5. Click Submit to save and assign the incident. A unique number is assigned to the incident.
Your user name is automatically populated in the Opened by field and current date is the
Created On date in the History field.
The incident will be displayed on the addressees Orders and Receiving summary screens
when they log on to Web Dispatch.
VIEWING INCIDENTS YOU HAVE ASSIGNED
> To list all open incidents you have assigned:
1. Go to the Incidents module, and from the List Incidents drop-down list, select List
Created Incidents. A list of all the open incidents you have assigned is displayed.
2. To view details for an incident, click the incident number of the incident you want to view.
C R E A T I N G AN D A SS I G NI N G I N C I D E N T S 1 9 5
VIEWING AND RESPONDING TO INCIDENTS

To view the incidents that have been assigned to you, follow the procedure in Viewing
Incidents Assigned to You on page 196.
To respond to incidents that have been assigned to you, follow the procedure in Responding to
an Incident on page 197.
VIEWING INCIDENTS ASSIGNED TO YOU
A list of all open incidents assigned to you is always displayed on the Orders and Receiving
summary screens. Lists of open incidents that pertain to a specific sales/work/transfer sales
order, purchase order, customer, vendor, or product are also displayed on the relevant Packslip,
Purchase Order, Customer, Vendor, or Product Report screens.
> To view details of an incident assigned to you:
1. Optionally, go to the Incidents module, and from the List Incidents drop-down list, select
Assigned Incidents. A list of all open incidents assigned to you is displayed.
2. From the list of incidents in the Incidents module, the Orders or Receiving summary
screen, or a Packslip, Purchase Order, Vendor, Customer, or Product Report screen, click
the number of the incident you want to view.
3. To respond to the incident, use any of the options described in Responding to an Incident
on page 197.
RESPONDING TO AN INCIDENT
To respond to an incident, you have several options:
Simply add a comment to it. When you update the incident, the new comment will be
displayed in the Incident Report.
Reassign it to another user. When you update the incident, the record will be removed
from your display and from your list of assigned incidents. The incident will appear in the
display for the user to whom you reassigned it.
Resolve it. When you update the incident, the record will be displayed with the status of
RESOLVED.
Close it. When you update the incident, the record will be removed from your display and
from that of the person who assigned it.
Your warehouse policy should determine who may exercise which actions, and when it is
appropriate to close incidents once they have been dealt with.
All of the options for handling an incident are described in the following procedure.
V I E W I N G A ND R E S P O N D I N G T O I N C I D E N T S 1 9 7
> To respond to an incident:
1. From the list of incidents in the Incidents module, the Orders or Receiving summary
screen, or a Packslip, Purchase Order, Vendor, Customer, or Product Report screen, click
the number of the incident you want to process. Incident Editor is displayed.
2. In the Notes field, enter a comment describing how you have resolved, or will resolve the
problem. When you submit the incident, the previous notes will display in the History
section as Old Notes.
3. If you need to modify the description, you may do so in the Description field. When you
submit the incident, the previous description will display in the History section as Old
Description.
To mark the incident as RESOLVED, and allow it to remain visible in the Web
Dispatch display, from the Status drop-down list, select Resolved.
To close the incident, and remove it from the system, from the Status drop-down list,
select Closed. In the Date Closed field, enter the date, in MM/DD/YYYY format.
To reassign the incident, from the Assigned To field, select the user ID of the person
to whom you want to re-assign the incident.
5. When done, click Submit. The incident will be updated according to the options you
selected, and all changes are documented in the History section.
V I E W I N G A ND R E S P O N D I N G T O I N C I D E N T S 1 9 9
7 GENERATING REPORTS
ABOUT REPORTS, MONITORS, AND LOGS

The Reports module in Web Dispatch provides you with several tools for monitoring current
warehouse activity and gathering historical and statistical data.
2 0 1
The Reports module is divided into seven screens, as follows:
Picking provides access to reports and functions related to sales orders.
Receiving Provides access to reports and functions related to purchase orders.
Inventory provides access to reports and functions related to products, license plates
and warehouse locations.
FCAST Forecasting If this is enabled for your system, provides access to reports and functions
related to forecasting and inventory management. These reports are discussed in a separate
document called Demand Forecasting.
Performance provides access to reports related to warehouse operations.
Miscellaneous Provides access to reports related to system maintenance and reporting,

inventory management, and functions related to product maintenance.
O/E Order Entry If this is enabled for your system, provides access to order entry function.
Described in Chapter 9, Entering Orders.
Custom provides the ability to generate reports that have been defined specifically for
your warehouse in your system setup.
Crystal Provides access to reports generated by the Crystal Reports application.
Waiting Lists all Crystal reports that have been generated.
Note: The reports discussed in this chapter represent most of the commonly used reports in
RADIO BEACON WMS. The actual lists of reports that you see depends on your
permissions, configuration and site customizations.
2 0 2 CHAPTER 7 G E N E R AT I N G R E P O R T S
ABOUT THE STANDARD REPORTS
The standard reports that are generated through the Picking, Receiving, Inventory,
Performance, and Miscellaneous screens are of several types:
Summary reports
These reports list groups of entities according to a selected criterion, such as a specific
date or period of time; provide overview information for each entity; and typically let you
link to other, more detailed reports. Summary-type reports are only available from the
Reports module. Examples of summary reports include the Order Consolidation Report,
which lists customers with multiple open orders; the Empty Bin Report, which lists bins
that are currently empty; or the Uploaded Shipment Report, which lists sales orders that
were uploaded on a given date.
Detailed reports
These reports provide in-depth information for an individual order, product, location,
customer, and vendor reports, and allow you to link to various other reports. These
comprise the Packslip, Purchase Order, Vendor, Customer, Bin and Product reports, all of
which are also linked to from the Orders and Receiving modules.
Statistical reports
Statistical reports show calculated totals or averages for various operations, to provide data
on your warehouses performance. Statistical-type reports are only available from the
Reports module, and typically do not link to other reports. Examples of statistical reports
include the Employee Statistics Report, which shows total transactions and transactions
per hour for all users on a selected date, for a given activity; the Cycle Time Report, which
shows total numbers of orders shipped within a particular number of days, for a selected
month; or the Activity Report, which shows the number of transactions per user for each
half-hour for a selected date, for a selected activity.
A B O U T R E P O R T S , M O N I T O R S , A N D L O G S 2 0 3
In addition to the Reports function, the following functionality provides real-time reporting of
WMS activity:
Monitors
Monitors show statistical data for all warehouse activities for each half hour for a selected
date. Historical monitors are only available from the Reports module, and include the
Activity Monitor Report, which displays totals for all activities in the warehouse, and the
Activity Report, which displays totals for a selected activity. The real-time activity
monitor for the current date is also available from the Monitor module, accessible from the
Web Dispatch navigation bar. Both are described in Monitoring Warehouse Activities on
page 250.
Logs
Log reports show every transaction recorded in the RADIO BEACON WMS log files, and
are very useful for troubleshooting purposes. They are described in detail in Chapter 11,
Troubleshooting on page 311.
The following provide a listing, by screen, of all the reports available, and the sections in this
chapter in which they are described.
PICKING REPORTS
Report Description
Exception See Releasing Orders with Held Lines on page 85
Packslip See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Quick Order Completion See Picking a Sales Order on page 128
Customer See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Order Consolidation Opportunities See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Uploaded Shipments See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Short Products See Managing Inventory on page 231
Truck Route See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Shipment Lookup See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Daily Shipping See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Report Description
Manifest Report See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Held Orders with Items Received See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Today
Create a Delivery See Creating Deliveries In RADIO BEACON on
page 130
RECEIVING REPORTS
Report Description
Purchase Order See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Quick Purchase Order Completion See Receiving a Purchase Order in Web Dispatch on
page 188
Vendor See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Vendor Product List See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Uploaded Receipts See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Receiving by PO See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Shortage See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Daily Receiving See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Create a Requisition See Demand Forecasting document
Create a Container See Creating Container References on page 182
RECV View Container See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Container Lookup See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
RMA Rush Products See Managing Inventory on page 231
RMA Issued See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
INVENTORY REPORTS
Report Description
Products See Managing Inventory on page 231
Product See Managing Inventory on page 231
Product Inventory See Managing Inventory on page 231
Reserved Stock See Managing Inventory on page 231
License Plate See Managing Inventory on page 231
Bin Detail See Managing Inventory on page 231
Bin Inventory See Managing Inventory on page 231
Empty Bin See Managing Inventory on page 231
Incremental Slotting See Managing Inventory on page 231
Replenishment See Managing Inventory on page 231
REPLEN Advance Replenishment See Running the Advance Replenishment Function on
page 305
PACK Packaging See Processing Packaging Orders on page 159
Multi Pack See Processing Packaging Orders on page 159
PERFORMANCE REPORTS
Report Description
Cycle Count See Managing Inventory on page 231
Cycle Count Accuracy See Measuring Warehouse Performance on page 251
Activity See Measuring Warehouse Performance on page 251
Activity Monitor See Monitoring Warehouse Activities on page 250
Picker Activity See Measuring Warehouse Performance on page 251
Employee Statistics See Measuring Warehouse Performance on page 251
Velocity by Bin See Managing Inventory on page 231
Top 100 See Managing Inventory on page 231
MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS
KIT Report Description

Assemblies Manager See Maintaining Kits on page 269
SHIP BOL SeeGenerating Bills of Lading and Manifests on page 125
Ad-Hoc SQL SeeGenerating Custom Reports on page 255
Shipping Errors See Managing Sales and Shipments on page 211
Errors on Date Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on page 311
Adjustments See Managing Inventory on page 231
Cycle Time See Measuring Warehouse Performance on page 251
PACK Packaging Manger See Maintaining Packaging Items on page 276
Picked, Unshipped Inventory See Managing Inventory on page 231
LOC Open Warehouse Transits See Managing Inventory on page 231
Daily Receipts See Managing Purchasing and Receiving on page 221
Daily Sales See Managing Inventory on page 231
Log Lookup Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on page 311
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS
The Reports module provides access to other functions, such as product maintenance, advance
replenishment, and so on. A summary of these is provided in the following table, which also
indicates the chapter in this manual in which they are described.
Report Screen Use to... Described in...

Quick Order Picking Pick an order from Picking a Sales Order on
Completion Web Dispatch. page 128 of Chapter 2,
Processing Sales Orders.
Export Picking Export shipment Picking a Sales Order on
Manifest information to a text file page 128 of Chapter 2,
SHIP that can be e-mailed to Processing Sales Orders.
ATS, a Canadian LTL
carrier.
Report Screen Use to... Described in...

Create Receiving Create a container Creating Container
RECV Container reference for multiple References on page 182 of
POs expected to arrive Chapter 5, Processing
together. Purchase Orders and
Returns.
Create a Picking Include partial or Creating Deliveries In
Delivery complete lines from RADIO BEACON on
multiple sales orders page 130 of Chapter 2,
into a single delivery for Processing Sales Orders.
a specific customer and
ship-to address.
REPLEN Replenishment Inventory View and generate Chapter 10, Using Advance
Report advance replenishment Replenishment on page 303.
requests.
Assemblies Miscellaneous View, create, and edit kit Maintaining Kits on
KIT Manger assemblies. page 269 of Chapter 8,
Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data.
Packaging Miscellaneous View, create, and edit Maintaining Packaging
Manger packaging items Items on page 276 of
PACK Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data.
BOL Report Miscellaneous View and edit bills of Generating Bills of Lading
SHIP lading/manifests that and Manifests on page 125
iyou have already of Chapter 2, Processing
created in Web Dispatch. Sales Orders.
PACK Packaging Inventory Generate packaging Chapter 4, Processing
Report orders based on product/ Packaging Orders on
packsize velocity or page 159.
days on hand.
Multi-Pack Inventory Generate packaging Chapter 4, Processing
PACK Packaging orders based on product/ Packaging Orders on
Report packsize velocity or page 159.
days on hand.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR GENERATING REPORTS
If your system is a multi-company or third-party logistics operation, many reports show client-
3PL specific information. If your user ID restricts you to viewing data for a specific client only, the
reports will only display data for that client. If your user ID allows you to access data for all
clients, you have the option of filtering the report to view data for a specific client only.
> To generate a report:
1. From the navigation bar, click Reports to open the Reports module.
2. In the Reports screen, click the tab listing the report you want to view.
For reports that display a single field in which you must enter an identifying number,
enter the appropriate identifier. For example, to generate a Packslip Report for sales
order number 197, enter 197 in the Packslip field.
For reports that display a Date field, enter the date for which you want to view data, or
leave the field blank to select todays date. For example, to generate an Activity
Report for August 5, 2002, enter 08/05/2002 in the Date field.
For reports that display Starting Date and Ending Date fields, enter the appropriate
dates to specify a period of time for which you want to view data, or leave the fields
blank to select todays date.
For reports that display multiple fields that allow you to narrow selection criteria or
specify a range of items, enter the relevant values, or leave them blank to simply
select all items in the system. For example, to generate a Replenishment Report for
zones D and G only, enter DG in the Zone field.
For reports that display a drop-down list, select the appropriate criterion or category
from the list (these are described for individual reports in the relevant sections of this
chapter). For example, to generate a Log Lookup Report according to user ID, select
User ID from the drop-down list.
If you are a multi-client/company system, and your user ID allows you to filter data
3PL by client, for reports that display the Client field, optionally enter the client name/
number to view the data for a single client only.
Tip: You can select, delete, cut, copy, and/or paste values from field to field, by right-
clicking in any field to display a pop-up menu from which you can select the desired
action. You can also select a recently-entered value, by clicking on the field, and
selecting the appropriate value from the drop-down list that appears.
4. When ready to display the report, click Go next to the report you are generating.
Once a report screen is displayed, you can click on column headings to sort records by that
category. In many reports, you can also click available links to access Packslip, PO, Customer,
Vendor, Product, and Bin reports.
MANAGING SALES AND SHIPMENTS

This section describes all reports available pertaining to customers, sales orders, picking,
shipping, and truck route management.
The following report provides information on customers:
Report Overview
Customer Provides customer information and displays open and closed sales orders
for a selected customer.
Described in Customer Report on page 213.
The following reports provide information on sales orders:
Report Overview
Packslip Provides details and statuses for a selected order.
Described in Packslip Report on page 214.
Order Lists customers with multiple open orders that may be consolidated.
Consolidation
Described in Order Consolidation Opportunities Report on page 215.
Opportunities
Held Orders Displays all the held short orders for which products were received
with Items today. You can select whether to include orders with HELD SHORT,
Received HELDSHORT and HELDFORMAT or all HELD Orders including
Today HELDREPLENIS status in the report. The report can help the dispatcher
decide which orders to process next.
M A N A G I N G S A L E S A N D SH I P M E N T S 2 1 1
The following reports provide information on shipments, truck routes, and closed/uploaded
sales orders. Some of these reports can help you plan shipping capacities, and troubleshoot
shipments.
Report Overview
Shipping Errors Lists all errors returned by an integrated shipping system when pre-rating
or rating of order cartons fails.
Described in Shipping Errors Report on page 216.
Truck Route Lists truck routes and stops for warehouse-managed deliveries.
Described in Truck Route Report on page 217.
Uploaded Lists orders that have been completed and uploaded for a selected period
Shipments of time.
Described in Uploaded Shipments Report on page 218.
Daily Shipping Provides shipping information for completed and uploaded orders for a
selected date.
Described in Daily Shipping Report on page 219.
Shipment Lists all orders that were shipped together for a selected shipment/
Lookup manifest/track-trace number.
Described in Shipment Lookup Report on page 220.
Manifest Lists all manifests that have been exported to a text file for processing by
ATS.
Described in Manifest Report on page 220.
CUSTOMER REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed Search by customer number, billing name, billing city, billing postal/zip code, email
for: address, shipping name, shipping city or shipping postal/zip code
Description: Displays general customer information and all outstanding and shipped sales orders for
the selected customer.
Example:
Additional Edit customer information. (Only available for users with the appropriate permissions.)
functions For more information, see Modifying Customer Information on page 282.
available:
Open your e-mail program and send an e-mail to a customer contact, by clicking the e-
mail address link.
Process an order or group of orders. (Only available if open orders are listed, and you
have the appropriate permissions.) For more information, see Chapter 2, Processing
Sales Orders on page 49.
PACKSLIP REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed Sales, work or transfer sales order number.
for:
Description: Provides a detailed history of the activities performed for a single sales or work order.
This report is useful as a diagnostic tool, and is described in detail in Understanding the
Packslip Report Screen in Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders.
Example:
Additional Edit general order information. (Only available for non-uploaded orders, for users with
functions the appropriate permissions.) For more information, see Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/
available: Packaging Order Information on page 261.
Edit order details. (Only available for non-uploaded orders, for users with the
appropriate permissions.) For more information, see Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/
Packaging Order Line Details on page 262.
Process the order. (Only available for users with the appropriate permissions.) For more
information, see Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders on page 49.
Add the order to a bill of lading/manifest. (Only available for non-uploaded orders.) For
more information, see Generating Bills of Lading and Manifests on page 125.
View the log for the order. (Only available for users with the appropriate permissions.)
For more information, Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on page 311.
Create an RMA for the order. (Only available for uploaded orders.) For more
information, see Entering RMAs on page 186 of Chapter 5, Processing Purchase
Orders and Returns.
ORDER CONSOLIDATION OPPORTUNITIES REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed All customers.
for:
Description: Lists customers that have multiple orders currently in the warehouse, that may
potentially be grouped or consolidated for shipment by the dispatcher. For more
information, see Understanding and Modifying Shipment Consolidation Options on
page 95 and Consolidating Orders on page 109 of Chapter 2, Processing Sales
Orders.
Example:
SHIPPING ERRORS REPORT
Report Miscellaneous
Screen:
Displayed All errors.
for:
Description: Displays all errors that have been encountered by a fully integrated shipping system,
such as ClipperShip or NeoPost, during the shipment rating and manifesting process.
The report shows the cause of the error and all shipping information for each carton in
an order that can not be rated. Shipping errors must be cleared before an order can be re-
rated and processed any further. For more information, see Handling Wait Pre-Rate
Orders on page 87 and Clearing Shipping Errors on page 116, and Handling
Shipping Errors in Using RADIO BEACON Handheld Functions.
Example:
TRUCK ROUTE REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed All truck routes.
for:
Description: Shows truck routes and stops for orders assigned to truck routes, for warehouses that
manage their own trucks and deliveries. The report also shows customers with orders
not assigned to any truck route (in left column). Weight and cube information can help
plan the space needed for orders, and the sequence in which shipping containers should
be loaded on to trucks.
Example:
UPLOADED SHIPMENTS REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed Selected time period, or current date.
for:
Description: Displays all orders that have been uploaded during a specified time period. The report
lists the order number, customer, lines, and number of cartons for each order uploaded.
Example:
DAILY SHIPPING REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed Selected date, or current date.
for:
Description: Shows all shipments for a selected date. For each shipment, the shipment number, order
number, customer, number of cartons, and total weight are displayed.
Example:
SHIPMENT LOOKUP REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed Shipment number.
for:
Description: Shows shipment information for a selected shipment, including shipping address,
shipment date, and order number(s).
Example:
MANIFEST REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed All manifests that have been exported to ATS in the last seven days. For information on
for: exporting manifest information and generating the report, see Picking a Sales Order
on page 128.
Description: Shows shipment information for a selected shipment, including shipping address, order
number(s), and carton information.
Example:
MANAGING PURCHASING AND RECEIVING

This section describes all reports that pertain to vendors, receiving, and purchasing decision-
making.
You can use the following reports to view information on vendors, and their products:
Report Overview
Vendor Provides vendor information, and displays open and closed purchase
orders for the selected vendor.
Described in Vendor Report on page 222.
Vendor Product List Lists all products for a selected vendor.
Described in Vendor Product List on page 224.
Shortage Lists suppliers of products that are currently unavailable in the
warehouse to fill open sales orders.
Described in Shortage Report on page 225.
The following reports provide information on purchase orders:
Report Overview
Purchase Order Shows details and statuses for a selected PO.
Described in Purchase Order Report on page 226.
Receiving by PO Displays summary information of a selected PO, and indicates whether
it is open or already received.
Described in Receiving Report by PO on page 227.
RECV View Container Lists the POs in a container for a selected container reference number.
Described in View Container Report on page 228.
Container Lookup same as above
RMA RMA Issued Lists all purchase orders generated by RMA issues, with returned
product information, for a selected date.
Described in RMA Issued Report on page 230.
M A N A G I N G P U R C H AS I N G A ND R EC E I V I NG 2 2 1
The following reports provide information on purchase orders that have already been received
in the warehouse:
Report Overview
Uploaded Lists uploaded POs for a selected upload date.
Receipts
Described in Uploaded Receipts Report on page 228.
Daily Lists all POs received during a selected period of time.
Receiving
Described in Daily Receiving Report on page 229.
Daily Receipts Similar to Receiving Report by PO, but lists all POs received on a selected
date.
Described in Daily Receipts Report on page 230.
VENDOR REPORT
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed Vendor number.
for:
Description: Displays general vendor information and all outstanding and closed purchase orders for
the selected vendor.
Additional Edit vendor information. (Only available if you have the appropriate permissions.) For
functions more information, see Maintaining Vendors on page 283.
available:
Example:
Additional Edit vendor information. (Only available for users with the appropriate permissions.)
functions For more information, see Modifying Vendor Information on page 284.
available:
Open your e-mail program and send an e-mail to a customer contact, by clicking the e-
mail address link.
VENDOR PRODUCT LIST
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed Vendor number.
for:
Description: Displays a list of products for the selected vendor, total quantities in the warehouse, and
quantities allocated to sales orders.
Example:
SHORTAGE REPORT
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed All short products.
for:
Description: Lists vendors that supply products that are currently short for outstanding sales orders.
The report also shows the total number of lines on all orders held short, for each vendor.
This report may be helpful in determining the suppliers from whom products should be
re-ordered immediately.
Example:
PURCHASE ORDER REPORT
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed PO number.
for:
Description: Provides detailed information on a selected purchase order, such as the number of lines
and units. Described in detail in Understanding the Purchase Order Report Screen on
page 173 of Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders and Returns.
Example:
Additional Process the order. (Only available for non-uploaded orders.) For more information, see
functions Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders and Returns on page 171.
available:
Edit general PO information. (Only available for non-uploaded orders, for users with the
appropriate permissions.) For more information, see Editing Purchase Order
Information on page 264.
Edit order details by adding a new line to the order, or editing or deleting an existing
line. (Only available for non-uploaded orders, for users with the appropriate
permissions.) For more information, see Editing or Deleting Purchase Order Line
Details on page 265.
View the log for the order. (Only available for users with the appropriate permissions.)
For more information, see Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on page 311.
RECEIVING REPORT BY PO
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed PO number.
for:
Description: Displays summary information for the selected PO, and indicates whether the products
on the PO are still on order, or have been received.
Example:
VIEW CONTAINER REPORT
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed Container number. To generate the report, see the procedure in Creating Container
for: References on page 182 of Chapter 5, Processing Purchase Orders and Returns.
Description: Lists purchase orders, lines and quantities associated with a selected container.
Example:
UPLOADED RECEIPTS REPORT
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed Selected upload date, or current date.
for:
Description: Lists POs closed and uploaded to the host system on a selected date.
Example:
DAILY RECEIVING REPORT
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed Time period, or current date.
for:
Description: Lists partially-received POs, the products and quantities received so far, and the bins to
which products were put away.
Example:
DAILY RECEIPTS REPORT

Screen:
Displayed for: Time period, or current date.
Description: Displays summary information for all POs closed and uploaded on a selected date.
Example:
RMA ISSUED REPORT
Report Screen: Receiving

Displayed for: All RMA-generated purchase orders for a selected date.
Description: Lists PO numbers, original sales orders, and product return information for RMA-
generated purchase orders.
Example:
MANAGING INVENTORY
This section describes all reports available for managing products, bins, and inventory in the
warehouse. The following reports provide detailed information on products, bins, and current
inventory levels:
Report Overview
Products A summary screen of stock in the warehouse, similar to the Orders and
Receiving summary screens.
Described in Products Report on page 234.
Product Provides detailed information for a selected product, including inventory,
current bin locations, and open purchase and sales orders on which the
product appears.
Described in Product Report on page 235 and Product Inventory
Report on page 236.
Product Lists total inventory for all products in the system.
Inventory
Described in Product Inventory Report on page 236.
Bin Detail Displays properties of a selected bin or system location, and the inventory
located in it.
Described in Bin Detail Report on page 237.
Bin Inventory Displays packsizes, quantities, and sales values of all products, for a range
of bins.
Described in Bin Inventory Report on page 238.
License Plate Displays license plate content and bin association for the selected license
plate.
Described in License Plate Report on page 239.
Empty Bin Lists currently empty bins.
Described in Cycle Count Report on page 240.
Cycle Count Lists cycle counting transactions and adjustments made during a selected
period of time.
Described in Cycle Count Report on page 240.
M AN A G I N G I N V E N T O R Y 2 3 1
The following reports provide information on products that are allocated, reserved, or required
for open or closed sales orders. Many of these reports may be helpful for determining the status
of products needed to fill sales outstanding sales orders.
Report Overview
Short Products Lists products that are short for orders, for a selected order allocation date.
Described in Short Products Report on page 242.
Rush Products Lists short items on a selected PO.
Described in Rush Products Report on page 243.
Replenishment Lists outstanding Let Down and Fill Bin requests in the system.
Described in Replenishment Report on page 244 and Running the
Advance Replenishment Function on page 305.
Reserved Stock Displays information on inventory that has been reserved by a handheld
user through the Direct Move function.
Described in Reserved Stock Report on page 245.
Open Displays warehouse/site transfers in progress.
LOC Warehouse
Described in Open Warehouse Transits Report on page 246
Transits
Picked, Lists products and quantities that have been picked but not shipped.
Unshipped
Described in Picked, Unshipped Inventory Report on page 247.
Inventory
Daily Sales Lists products that were received on POs and shipped in sales orders on the
same day.
Described in Daily Sales Report on page 247.
Adjustments Provides details on all inventory adjustments made during a specified time
period.
Described in Adjustments Report on page 241
The following reports provide statistical information that can help you to determine optimal
stock rotation and placement strategies according to faster- and slower-moving products:
Report Overview
Top 100 Lists the 100 top-selling products, defined by the number of lines, and
quantities ordered, in open sales orders.
Described in Top 100 Report on page 248.
Velocity by Bin Shows velocity and forecast number of days of inventory for each product,
for a selected range of bins.
Described in Velocity by Bin Report on page 249.
Incremental Shows where products should be placed in the warehouse.
Slotting
Described in Incremental Slotting Report on page 249
PRODUCTS REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed for: All stock in the warehouse.
Description: Provides a summary of warehouse stock statistics.
Example:
Additional Functionality similar to Orders and Receiving Summary screen, with links to Product
functions Details screens and product reports. See Using the Orders Summary Screens on
available: page 14.
PRODUCT REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed for: Product number.
Description: Provides detailed information on a selected product, including product characteristics,
inventory, and bin locations. The report also provides information on all open sales or
purchase orders in which the product appears.
Example:
Additional View order history for the product. For more information, see Product Inventory
functions Report on page 236.
available:
Edit product information. (Only available if you have the appropriate permissions.) For
more information, see Maintaining Products on page 266.
View the log for the product. (Only available if you have the appropriate permissions.)
For more information, see Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on page 311.
Process open sales orders. (Only available if you have the appropriate permissions.) For
more information, see Chapter 2, Processing Sales Orders on page 49.
PRODUCT INVENTORY REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed All products.
for:
Description: Lists the total on-hand quantities of all products in the warehouse.
Example:
BIN DETAIL REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed Bin number, virtual location, or system location.
for:
Description: Indicates the type, zone, and status of a selected bin, and provides a summary of
packsizes, total quantities, and unallocated quantities (if any), of products stored in the
bin.
Example:
Additional View the log for the bin. (Only available if you have the appropriate permissions.) For
functions more information, see Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on page 311.
available:
BIN INVENTORY REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed Selected range of bins.
for:
Description: Provides detailed product and inventory information for a selected range of bins.
Example:
EMPTY BIN REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed All empty bins.
for:
Description: Lists bins that are currently empty. This report can be useful for searching for
homes for new products in the warehouse, especially if your warehouse uses
sticky bins.
Example:
LICENSE PLATE REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed License plate number
for:
Description: Displays license plate information and contents.
Example:
Additional View the log for the license plate (Only available if you have the appropriate
functions permissions.) For more information, see Chapter 11, Troubleshooting on page 311.
available:
CYCLE COUNT REPORT
Report Performance
Screen:
for:
Description: Shows all cycle counting transactions, and the adjustments that were made for each
product counted, for a selected period of time. A negative quantity indicates that the
quantity was adjusted out of the bin during counting.
Note: You can also generate a statistical report that displays the accuracy of cycle
counting over a selected period of time. See Cycle Count Accuracy Report on
page 251.
Example:
ADJUSTMENTS REPORT
Screen:
for:
Description: Provides details on all inventory adjustments made during a specified time period. The
report provides details on the type of adjustment made, the date, time, and user for the
adjustment, the products and quantities adjusted, and any PO numbers that were
associated with non-PO receipts. Adjustments of inventory into the warehouse are
represented by a positive number; adjustments out of the warehouse are represented by a
negative number.
Example:
SHORT PRODUCTS REPORT
Report Picking
Screen:
Displayed Selected allocation date, or current date.
for:
Description: Indicates all the products that are short for sales orders that have been run through the
allocation process. For each product, the report also indicates quantities required to fill
outstanding sales or work orders. This report may be helpful in determining the products
that need to be re-ordered from suppliers.
Example:
RUSH PRODUCTS REPORT
Report Receiving
Screen:
Displayed A selected purchase order that has been received, or a pallet number.
for:
Description: Lists products and quantities that are short for open sales orders and have been received
on the selected purchase order. This report may be helpful for determining when orders
held short may be re-allocated, as it shows the short items that have since been received
into the warehouse.
Example:
REPLENISHMENT REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed Selected picking zone (Zone selection), replenishment group (Group selection), or all
for: zones and groups.
Description: Lists open Let Down and/or Fill Bin requests. The report lists the overstock bins from
which the required stock should be let down, and the pick bins to which the required
stock should be moved. Kit replenishment requests are identified by the work order
number that generated them; by default, advance replenishment requests are identified
by the group ADVANCE (unless the dispatcher has assigned them to other groups).
This report is primarily used to monitor when replenishment processes have been
completed, so that held for replenishment orders may be re-allocated.
Example:
Additional Generate and view an advance replenishment report, and issue advance replenishment
functions requests. (Only available for users with the appropriate permissions.) For more
available: information, see Chapter 10, Using Advance Replenishment on page 303.
RESERVED STOCK REPORT
Report Inventory
Screen:
Displayed All reserved inventory.
for:
Description: Shows reserved stock, its bin location, the user who reserved it, the users comment, and
the date it was reserved. Note that stock can only be unreserved from the handheld. For
more information, see Reserving and Unreserving Inventory in Using RADIO
BEACON Handheld Functions.
Example:
OPEN WAREHOUSE TRANSITS REPORT
Screen:
Displayed Displays warehouse/site transfers in progress. Displays all warehouse transfers that have
for: open transfer sales/purchase orders in RADIO BEACON WMS.
Description: Shows packslip, transit location, original warehouse, destination warehouse and transit
warehouse.
Example:
PICKED, UNSHIPPED INVENTORY REPORT
Screen:
Displayed Current month.
for:
Description: Lists quantities and sales values of products that have been picked but not yet shipped,
for the current month.
Example:
DAILY SALES REPORT
Screen:
Displayed Selected date, or current date.
for:
Description: Displays summary information for all products that were received and shipped on sales
orders in the same day.
TOP 100 REPORT
Report Performance
Screen:
Displayed All products on open sales orders.
for:
Description: Lists the top 100 products on outstanding sales orders in the warehouse, according to
both the total number lines appearing on sales orders, and the total quantities ordered.
This report may be useful for identifying products that may be put in forward
(temporary) pick bins or pallet pick bins to increase productivity for the most
frequently-picked products.
Example:
VELOCITY BY BIN REPORT
Report Screen: Performance

Displayed for: Selected range of bins.
Description: Shows the average number of picks per day and forecast number of days of
inventory available for each product in a selected range of bins.
Note: The Calculate Demand Requirements function must have been run in RFBase
for velocity records to be generated, and there must have been picks for the
standard packsizes in the bin(s) selected.
Example:
INCREMENTAL SLOTTING REPORT
Report Screen: Inventory

Displayed for: Selected bin range
Description: This report is important in determining where products should be placed in the
warehouse. The highest and lowest moving products in each zone are reported. The
highest and lowest are determined by the average number of picks for each product.
MONITORING WAREHOUSE ACTIVITIES

The Monitor displays total numbers of all warehouse transactions, broken down by activity, for
each half hour, for the current date.The Activity Monitor displays total numbers of all
warehouse transactions, broken down by activity, for each half hour, for a selected date.
ACTIVITY MONITOR REPORT

Report Screen: Performance
Displayed for: Selected date, or current date. You can also access the real-time activity monitor for
the current date by accessing the Monitor module from the navigation bar. This will
update the Activity Monitor each half-hour during the day.
Description: Shows total numbers of orders and transactions processed in the warehouse for each
half-hour for a selected date.
Note: You can also generate an Activity Report that displays total numbers of units/
lines picked, received and moved, and bins counted for each user in the warehouse for
each half-hour of a selected date. For information, see Activity Report on page 252.
Example:
MEASURING WAREHOUSE PERFORMANCE

This section describes reports that provide statistical information on the productivity and
efficiency of your warehouse processes, including the following:
Report Overview
Cycle Count Displays total numbers of cycle counting transactions and accuracy
Accuracy percentage for a selected period of time.
Described in Cycle Count Accuracy Report on page 251.
Activity Displays total numbers of transactions for each user, for a selected date,
for a selected activity.
Described in Activity Report on page 252.
Picker Activity Lists users with warehouse activity, and the number of picks accomplished
in a specified number of minutes, for a selected date.
Described in Picker Activity Report on page 253.
Employee Displays total numbers of transactions and transactions per hour for all
Statistics users, for a selected activity, for a selected date.
Described in Employee Statistics Report on page 253.
Cycle Time Shows percentage of orders shipped on the same day, second day, and
third day, for a selected month.
Described in Cycle Time Report on page 254.
CYCLE COUNT ACCURACY REPORT
Report Performance
Screen:
for:
Description: Shows statistics for cycle counting transactions, including the total number of bins
counted, and the percentage accuracy rate, for a selected period of time.
M E A SU R I N G W A R E H O U S E P E R F O R M A N C E 2 5 1
ACTIVITY REPORT
Report Screen Performance

Displayed for: Selected date.
Description: Shows the total number of transactions for each half-hour on a selected date for each
user in the warehouse, for the selected activity, including the following:
PICKORDR orders picked.
PICKLINE lines picked.
RECVCODE purchase orders opened or completed and product units received.
CYCL_CPL bins cycle counted and product units counted.
CYCL_ADJ adjustments made to inventory through cycle counting and product units
adjusted.
ADJUST adjustments made to inventory by all methods (cycle counting,
miscellaneous adjustments, non-PO receipts, etc.)
SHIPPED orders shipped and product units shipped.
DNLOAD sales, work and purchase orders downloaded.
REPLENIS hot replenishment requests issued and product units requested.
NEWLABEL new carton labels generated.
ADV-REPL advance replenishment requests issued and product units requested.
MOVE-IN moves in by Direct Move, Fill Bins, Misc Adjusts, Cycle Counts, and
receipts, and product units handled.
MOVE-OUT moves out by Direct Move, Letdown, Misc Adjusts, Cycle Counts, and
picks, and product units handled.
Example:
PICKER ACTIVITY REPORT
Report Performance
Screen:
Displayed All users for a specified number of minutes, on a selected date.
for:
Description: Shows the average number of picks, i.e. the number of different bins to which the picker
was directed for each product, in the specified time period.
Example:
EMPLOYEE STATISTICS REPORT
Report Performance
Screen:
Displayed Selected time period.
for:
Description: Shows productivity statistics for all users in the warehouse, for a selected period of time,
by showing the total number of units handled, the total number of hours on task, and the
number of units processed per hour. Specifically, it displays statistics for the following
activities:
Picking units and lines picked.
Receiving units and lines received.
Material Handling units and moves.
Cycle Counting bins counted.
Example:
M E A SU R I N G W A R E H O U S E P E R F O R M A N C E 2 5 3
CYCLE TIME REPORT
Screen:
Displayed Selected month.
for:
Description: Shows the total number of sales orders downloaded for each day of the month, and the
percentage of orders shipped within the same day, 2 days, 3 days, and more than 3 days.
Example:
GENERATING CUSTOM REPORTS

RADIO BEACON WMS offers the facility to create custom-defined reports that allow you to
query the entire database to search for specific data.
Report Overview
Custom Allow you to call custom-defined SQL scripts. To set up these reports, the
SQL scripts must be accessible on the network to the central RFBase
server, and identified in the RADIO BEACON WMS setup. For more
information on configuring these reports, contact your system
administrator or Radio Beacon representative.
Ad-Hoc SQL Allows you to create SQL statements and query the RADIO BEACON WMS
database to generate custom reports on-the-fly.
Described in Ad Hoc SQL Report on page 255.
AD HOC SQL REPORT
This report, available from the Miscellaneous screen, allows you to define SQL statements to
query the most commonly accessed RADIO BEACON WMS database tables, and format the
results in a standard Web Dispatch report.
Note that running this report requires not only knowledge of the SQL language, but also some
familiarity with the RADIO BEACON WMS database and the kinds of data that each table
contains. For assistance, contact a system administrator or your Radio Beacon representative.
G E N E R A T I N G C U S T O M R E P O R T S 2 5 5
Here is a basic summary of the tables that may be queried:
Table Contains...
ADJUSTS Miscellaneous adjustment records.
ASNDETL Carton content line details as specified on ASN label.
ASNHEAD ASN carton label general information.
ASSEMBLY Definitions of kit assemblies.
AVAILABL Inventory available from a vendor (quantities in vendors warehouse).
BACKRD Historical line detail records for uploaded (closed) purchase orders.
BACKRH Historical general data records for uploaded (closed) purchase orders.
BCODEREF Barcode reference numbers for products.
BINMSTR Bin records.
BINLOCAT Inventory (product location) records.
BOL Bill of lading records for BOLs created in Web Dispatch.
CARRIERS Rules and service definitions for shipping carriers used by the
warehouse.
CONFIG All configuration settings other than those specified in the RULES,
CARRIERS, LOCATION, PERMISS, PROCALRT, SHIPPING, and
PRODCLAS tables.
CUSTMSTR Customer records.
DNLOAD Records downloaded from host systems to RADIO BEACON WMS and
not yet processed.
INCIDENT Records for incidents created in Web Dispatch.
LOCATION Definitions of locations (for multi-site warehouses).
PERMISS Definitions of user privilege levels.
PICKHEAD General data records for active (open) sales orders.
PICKDETL General line detail records for active (open) sales orders.
PICKLOC Pick location records for allocated orders.
PROCALRT Definitions of custom-defined pivots, alerts, and filters used in Web
Dispatch.
PRODCLAS Definitions of product classes (if used).
Table Contains...
PRODMSTR Product records.
RECVHEAD General data records for active (open) purchase orders.
RECVDETL Line detail records for active (open) purchase orders.
RECVDET2 General and line detail records for non-PO receipts.
RFLOG Log records for all warehouse transactions and system messages.
REPLENIS Replenishment request records.
RULES Definitions of bin types and rules.
SHIPDETL Historical shipment carton contents records for uploaded (closed)
sales orders.
SHIPMSTR Historical shipment carton records for uploaded (closed) sales orders.
SHIPHIST Historical general data records for uploaded (closed) sales orders.
SHIPLINE Historical line detail records for uploaded (closed) sales orders.
SHIPPING Definitions and translations of shipping codes used by shipping
systems for use by host systems.
SUBSTITUTE Substitute product records (if used).
TOTEDETL Shipment carton contents records for active (open) sales orders.
TOTMASTR Shipment carton records for active (open) sales orders.
TRANSLOG Log records for all warehouse transactions
TRANSFER Transfer (upload) to host confirmation records.
UPLOAD Records uploaded from RADIO BEACON WMS to host systems and not
yet processed by host systems.
VENDMSTR Vendor records.
G E N E R A T I N G C U S T O M R E P O R T S 2 5 7
> To run an SQL report:
1. In the Select, Where, Group by, and Order by fields, enter the components of the desired
SQL statement that will generate the appropriate results.
Tip: To select all records from the desired table, simply enter * in the Select field.
2. From the From drop-down list, select the database table against which you want to run the
query.
3. Optionally, enable Evaluate Only, and click Submit to run the query and return the
number of results.
4. If necessary, modify your SQL statement to further refine the search criteria.
5. When satisfied with the number of results returned, enable Evaluate & Display, and click
Submit to display the results.
The following example submitted a query to return all records from the RULES table, which is
the table that defines bin rules in the warehouse.
8 EDITING ORDERS AND

WAREHOUSE DATA
This chapter discusses the following functions, which allow users with the appropriate
permissions to update the RADIO BEACON database directly from Web Dispatch:
Editing sales orders, transfer sales orders or work ordersdescribed in Editing Sales,
Work, Packaging and Transfer Sales Orders on page 260.
Editing purchase orders or transfer purchase ordersdescribed in Editing Purchase

Orders and Transfer Purchase Orders on page 263.
Updating and adding new productsdescribed in Maintaining Products on page 266.
KIT Updating and adding new kits and co-productsdescribed in Maintaining Kits on
page 269.
PACK Updating and adding new packaging itemsdescribed in Maintaining Packaging Items
on page 276.
Updating and adding new customersdescribed in Maintaining Customers on

page 281.
Updating and adding new vendorsdescribed in Maintaining Vendors on page 283.
Note: Any changes you make in Web Dispatch do not update your host system. Therefore, if
you are using a host system, you should only edit data in Web Dispatch in exceptional
circumstances.
2 5 9
EDITING SALES, WORK, PACKAGING AND

TRANSFER SALES ORDERS
If you have the appropriate permissions, you can directly edit a sales/work/transfer sales/
packaging order in Web Dispatch. There are two different screens you access to edit sales
orders: the first contains general order information, including the order description, and
shipping information (representing data contained in the PICKHEAD database table); the
second contains order line detail information (representing data contained in the PICKDETL
database table). If you want to edit general information in a sales or work order, follow the
instructions in Editing Sales/Work/Transfer/Packaging Order Information on page 261. If
you need to edit a line in a sales or work order, follow the instructions in Editing Sales/Work/
Transfer/Packaging Order Line Details on page 262.
Note that you can only edit an order as long as it is open, that is, in any status except READY
TO UPLOAD. Once it has been marked as shipped and ready to upload, it can no longer be
modified.
Note also that you can only edit a very limited number of fields; fields that may not be edited
are greyed out.
2 6 0 CHAPTER 8 E D I T I N G O R D E R S A N D W A R E H O U SE D A T A
EDITING SALES/WORK/TRANSFER/PACKAGING
ORDER INFORMATION
> To edit general sales, transfer sales or work order information:
1. Display the Packslip Report for the desired order, using any method.
2. Click the Edit button. The SO Editor screen is displayed.
3. Edit any of the fields for which you want to update information. Click the tabs to access
additional fields to edit. For more information on many of the fields, see the description of
PH records in the document Host Interchange Transactions, available at http://
002.radiobeacon.com/resources/downloads/Host/host_interchange_transactions.pdf.
4. When done, click Submit to save your changes, or Close to cancel. You are returned to the
Packslip Report screen.
EDITING SALES, WORK, PACKAGING AND TRANSFER SALES ORDERS 261

EDITING SALES/WORK/TRANSFER/PACKAGING ORDER LINE

DETAILS
If you want to edit line details for a sales, transfer sales or work order, you must open the SO
Details screen for each line you want to edit.
> To edit a line in an existing sales/transfer sales/work order:
1. Display the Packslip Report for the desired sales/transfer sales/work order, using any
method.
2. In the Packslip Details section, under the Edit Column column heading, click the Edit
link next to the line you wish to edit. The SO detail screen is displayed.
3. Edit any of the fields. Click the tabs to access additional fields to edit. For more
information on many of the fields, see the description of PD records in the document Host
Interchange Transactions available at http://002.radiobeacon.com/resources/downloads/
Host/host_interchange_transactions.pdf.
Packslip Order Report screen.
5. Repeat the procedure for all lines you want to edit for this order.
EDITING PURCHASE ORDERS AND TRANSFER

PURCHASE ORDERS
If you have the appropriate permissions, you can directly edit a purchase order or transfer
purchase order in Web Dispatch. There are two different screens you access to edit purchase
orders: the first contains general purchase order information, including the purchase order
description, and shipping instructions (representing data contained in the RECVHEAD
database table); the second contains purchase order line detail information (representing data
contained in the RECVDETL database table). If you want to edit general information in a
purchase order, follow the instructions in Editing Purchase Order Information on page 264.
If you need to add, edit or delete a line in a purchase order, follow the instructions in Editing
or Deleting Purchase Order Line Details on page 265.
Note that you can only edit a purchase order as long as it is open, that is, in the statuses of
NOT RECEIVED or BEING RECEIVED. Purchase orders created using Web Order entry in
O/E Web Dispatch can also be edited in APPROVED status, if your system is configured for the
dispatcher to release orders to the warehouse floor.
Once a purchase has been marked as closed and ready to upload, it can no longer be
modified.
EDITING PURCHASE ORDERS AND TRANSFER PURCHASE ORDERS 263

EDITING PURCHASE ORDER INFORMATION
> To edit general purchase order information:
1. Display the Purchase Order Report for the desired purchase order or transfer purchase
order, using any method.
2. Click the Edit button. The PO Editor screen is displayed.
3. Edit any of the fields for which you want to update information. For more information on
many of the fields, see the description of RH records in the document Host Interchange
Transactions, available at http://002.radiobeacon.com/resources/downloads/Host/
host_interchange_transactions.pdf.
Purchase Order Report screen.
EDITING OR DELETING PURCHASE ORDER LINE DETAILS
If you want to edit line details for a purchase order, you must open the PO Detail Information
screen for each line you want to edit. Depending on your configuration, you may be able to:
Edit an existing linefollow the instructions in Editing Lines in a Purchase Order.
Delete an existing linefollow the instructions in Deleting Lines from a Purchase Order
on page 266.
EDITING LINES IN A PURCHASE ORDER
> To edit a line in a purchase order:
1. Display the Purchase Order Report for the desired purchase order, using any method.
2. Under the PO Line Edit column heading, click the Edit link next to the line you wish to
edit. The PO Detail screen is displayed.
EDITING PURCHASE ORDERS AND TRANSFER PURCHASE ORDERS 265

3. Edit any of the relevant fields. For more information on many of the fields, see the
description of RD records in the document Host Interchange Transactions, available at
http://002.radiobeacon.com/resources/downloads/Host/host_interchange_transactions.pdf.
Purchase Order Report screen.
5. Repeat the procedure for all lines you want to edit in this purchase order.
DELETING LINES FROM A PURCHASE ORDER
You can delete lines from purchase orders if your system is configured to allow it.
> To delete a line from a purchase order:
1. Display the Purchase Order Report for the desired purchase order, using any method.
2. Under the Delete column heading, click the Delete link next to the line you wish to delete.
You are prompted to confirm the deletion.
3. Click Delete to delete the item (or Cancel to cancel). You are returned to the Purchase
Order Report screen, and the selected line is removed from the report.
MAINTAINING PRODUCTS
If you need to update product information in Web Dispatch, you can modify existing products,
or even add new products to the system, provided you have the appropriate permissions to do
so. To modify existing product information, follow the instructions in Modifying Product
Information below. To create a new product, follow the instructions in Adding a New
Product on page 269.
MODIFYING PRODUCT INFORMATION
> To edit product information:
1. Display the Product Report screen for the desired product, by using any method.
2. Click the Edit button. The Product Editor screen is displayed.
MAINTAINING PRODUCTS 267

3. Click the Additional tab to see additional product fields.
4. Edit any of the fields on either of these tabs for which you want to update information.
5. For more information about most of the fields on either of these tabs, consult the section
on Vendor Availability (VA) records in the document Host Interchange Transactions,
available at http://002.radiobeacon.com/resources/downloads/Host/
host_interchange_transactions.pdf.
Product Report screen.
ADDING A NEW PRODUCT
If your system is configured to allow you to add new products from the Web, you can do so
from the Reports module in Web Dispatch.
> To create a product:
1. Go to the Reports module, and select the Inventory tab to display the Inventory Reports
screen.
2. Next to the Product selection, in the Product field, enter a number for the new product,
and click Go. The Product Editor screen is displayed, with the new product number.
3. In the Description field, enter a description or name of the product.
4. In the Item Type field, if the product you are adding is to be a kit, enter F; if the product
you are adding is to be a packaging item, enter P.
5. Enter information in any other relevant fields on either tab, as described in Modifying
Product Information on page 267.
6. When done, click Submit to create the product (or Close to cancel). The Product Report
screen is displayed for the new product.
MAINTAINING KITS
KIT You can use Web Dispatch to modify existing kits and co-products, and even add new kits,
provided that they are already defined as products in the RADIO BEACON WMS database.
To edit an existing kit, see Editing an Existing Kit on page 270.
To add a new kit, see Adding a Kit on page 274.
To delete a kit, see Deleting a Kit on page 275.
MAINTAINING KITS 269

EDITING AN EXISTING KIT
You can edit a kit by adding, editing or deleting components or service items from the recipe
of the kit. Although a service item usually represents a non-tangible, such as labour, it must be
defined as a product in the RADIO BEACON database before you can add the item to a kit. To
define a service item as a product, follow the instructions in Adding a New Product on
page 269.
> To edit a kit:
2. Click the Miscellaneous tab to display the Miscellaneous Reports screen.
3. Next to the Assemblies Manager selection, click Go. Any existing kits are displayed.
4. Click the link under the Assembly # heading for the kit you want to edit. The details of the
kit are displayed.
5. To edit an existing kit, you can do any of the following:
Add a component/service item to the kit. See Adding a Component/Service Item to a

Kit on page 271.
Edit a component/service item of the kit. See Editing a Component/Service Item on

page 273.
Delete a component/service item from the kit. Deleting a Component/Service Item

from a Kit on page 273.
Add a service item to the kit. See Adding a Component/Service Item to a Kit on
page 271.
Edit a service item of the kit. See Editing a Component/Service Item on page 273.
Delete a service item from a kit. See Deleting a Component/Service Item from a Kit
on page 273.
ADDING A COMPONENT/SERVICE ITEM TO A KIT
When you create a new kit, you must immediately add at least one component to define the kit.
You can also add a component/service item to an existing kit. Although a service item usually
represents a non-tangible, such as labour, it must be defined as a product in the RADIO BEACON
WMS database before you can add the item to a kit. To define a service item as a product,
follow the instructions in Adding a New Product on page 269.

> To add a component/service item to a kit:
1. Follow the procedure in Editing an Existing Kit on page 270 to get to the kit details
screen.
2. Click the Add Component button. The Assembly Component Edit screen is displayed.
3. In the Product field, enter the product number of the product/service item to be added to
the kit.
4. In the Description field, enter the name of the product/service item you are adding.
5. In the Needed Quantity field, enter the quantity of this product/service item required to
build the kit.
6. Optionally, enter other information in the relevant fields.
7. When done, click Save. The new component is added to the kit.
EDITING A COMPONENT/SERVICE ITEM
> To edit a component:
screen.
2. Under the Edit heading, click the Edit link next to the component/service item you want to
edit. The Assembly Component Edit screen is displayed.
3. Edit the relevant fields.
4. When done, click Save.
DELETING A COMPONENT/SERVICE ITEM FROM A KIT
> To delete a component from a kit:
screen.
2. Select the checkbox under the Mark heading for each component/service item you want to
delete.
3. Click the Delete Components button. You are asked to confirm the deletion.
4. Click OK. The component(s)/service item(s) are removed from the kit.

ADDING A KIT
You can create a kit in Web Dispatch, if the kit has already been defined as a product in the
RADIO BEACON WMS database, with an item type of F. To define a kit as a product, follow
the instructions in Adding a New Product on page 269.
> To create a kit:
4. Click the Add New Assembly button. The Create New Assembly screen is displayed.
5. In the Product field, enter the product number for the kit.
6. In the Description field, enter a description or name of the kit.
7. Optionally, enter any other information in the relevant fields.
8. When done, click Save. Your kit has been created and displays in the Assemblies Manager
screen.
9. Click the link under the Assembly # heading for the new kit.
10. Define the components/service items needed for the kit as described in Adding a
Component/Service Item to a Kit on page 271.
DELETING A KIT
> To delete a kit:

4. Select the checkbox under the Mark heading for each kit you want to delete.
5. Click the Delete Assemblies button. You are asked to confirm the deletion.
6. Click OK. The kit(s) are deleted.
MAINTAINING PACKAGING ITEMS

PACK You can use Web Dispatch to modify existing packaging items, and even add new packaging
items, provided that they are already defined as products in the RADIO BEACON WMS
database.
To add a new packaging item, see Adding a Packaging Item on page 276.
To edit an existing packaging item, see Editing an Existing Packaging item on page 278.
To delete a packaging item, see Deleting a Packaging Item on page 281.
ADDING A PACKAGING ITEM
You can create a packaging item in Web Dispatch, if the item has already been defined as a
product in the RADIO BEACON WMS database, with an item type of P. To define a packaging
item as a product, follow the instructions in Adding a New Product on page 269.
> To create a packaging item:
3. Next to the Packaging Manger selection, click Go. Any existing packaging items are
displayed.
4. Click the Add New Package button. The Create New Package screen is displayed.
5. In the Product field, enter the product number for the packaging item.
6. In the Description field, enter a description or name of the packaging item.
7. Optionally, enter any other information in the relevant fields.
8. When done, click Save. The new package item displays in the Packaging Manager screen.
9. To add components to the packaging item follow the procedures in Adding a Component
To a Packaging Item on page 280.
MAINTAINING PACKAGING ITEMS 277

EDITING AN EXISTING PACKAGING ITEM
To edit the product definition for a packaging item:
1. In the Reports module, click the Miscellaneous tab to display the Miscellaneous Reports
screen.
2. Next to the Packaging Manager selection, click Go. Any existing packaging items are
displayed.
3. Click the packaging item link under the Package # heading. The details of the packaging
item are displayed, showing a components list.
4. To edit an existing packaging item, you can do any of the following:
Edit the components that are defined for the packaging item. See Editing Packaging Item
Components.
Add a component to the packaging item. See Adding a Component To a Packaging Item
on page 280.
Delete a component from a packaging item. See Deleting a Text Line from a Packaging
Item on page 281.
EDITING PACKAGING ITEM COMPONENTS
> To edit the components that are defined for a packaging item:
1. Follow the procedure in Editing an Existing Packaging item on page 278 to get to the
Components List in packaging items detail screen.
2. Click the Edit link under the Edit PKG Component heading for the component you want
to edit. The Package Component Edit screen is displayed.
3. Edit the relevant fields.
4. When done, click Save.
MAINTAINING PACKAGING ITEMS 279

ADDING A COMPONENT TO A PACKAGING ITEM
You can add a comment, or text line to an existing or new packaging item.
> To add a text line to a packaging item:
packaging items detail screen.
2. Click the Add Component button. The Package Component Edit screen is displayed.
3. In the Product field, enter the product number of the component to be added to the
packaging item.
4. In the Description field, enter the name of the component you are adding.
5. In the Needed Quantity field, enter the quantity of this component required for the
packaging item.
6. Optionally, enter other information in the relevant fields.
7. When done, click Save. The new component is added to the packaging item.
DELETING A TEXT LINE FROM A PACKAGING ITEM
> To delete a text line from a packaging item:
packaging items detail screen.
2. Select the checkbox under the Mark heading for each component you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete Components button. You are asked to confirm the deletion.
4. Click OK. The component(s) are removed from the packaging item.
DELETING A PACKAGING ITEM
> To delete a packaging item:
1. In the Reports module, click the Miscellaneous tab to display the Miscellaneous Reports
screen.
2. Next to the Packaging Manager selection, click Go. Any existing packaging items are
displayed.
3. Select the checkbox under the Mark heading for each packaging item you want to delete.
4. Click the Delete Packages button. You are asked to confirm the deletion.
5. Click OK. The packaging item(s) are deleted.
MAINTAINING CUSTOMERS
If you need to update customer information in Web Dispatch, you can modify existing
customer data, or even add new customers to the system, provided you have the appropriate
permissions. To modify existing customer information, follow the instructions in Modifying
Customer Information on page 282 below. To create a new customer, follow the instructions
in Adding a New Customer on page 283.
MAINTAINING CUSTOMERS 281

MODIFYING CUSTOMER INFORMATION
> To edit customer information:
1. Display the Customer Report screen for the desired customer, by using any method.
2. Click the Edit button. The Customer Editor screen is displayed.
3. Edit any of the fields for which you want to update information. When done, click Submit
to save your changes, or Close to cancel. You are returned to the Customer Report screen.
ADDING A NEW CUSTOMER
> To create a customer:
3. Next to the Customer selection, from the Search By drop-down list, select Customer
Number.
4. In the Customer field, enter a new (unused) customer number, and click Go. A message
displays that the vendor is not found in the database.
5. Click the Create Customer button.The Customer Editor screen is displayed, with the new
customer number.
6. Enter information in the relevant fields, as described in Modifying Customer

Information on page 282.
7. When done, click Submit to create the product (or Reset to cancel). The Customer Report
screen is displayed for the new customer.
MAINTAINING VENDORS
If need to update vendor information in Web Dispatch, you can modify existing vendor data, or
even add new vendors to the system, provided you have the appropriate permissions. To
modify existing vendor information, follow the instructions in Modifying Vendor
Information on page 284 below. To create a new vendor, follow the instructions in Adding a
New Vendor on page 285.
MAINTAINING VENDORS 283

MODIFYING VENDOR INFORMATION
> To edit vendor information:
1. Display the Vendor Report screen for the desired vendor, by using any method.
2. Click the Edit button. The Vendor Information screen is displayed.
3. Edit any of the fields for which you want to update information. When done, click Submit
to save your changes, or Close to cancel. You are returned to the Vendor Report screen.
ADDING A NEW VENDOR
> To create a vendor:
2. Click the Receiving tab to display the Receiving Reports screen.
3. In the Vendor field, enter a new (unused) vendor number, and click Go. A message
displays that the vendor is not found in the database.
4. Click the Create Vendor button. The Vendor Information screen is displayed, with the
new vendor number.
5. Enter information in the relevant fields, as described in Modifying Vendor Information

on page 284.
6. When done, click Submit to create the vendor (or Close to cancel). The Vendor Report
screen is displayed for the new vendor.
MAINTAINING VENDORS 285

9 ENTERING ORDERS
O/E
If your system is configured to allow Web order entry, you can create purchase orders, sales
orders, transfer and packaging orders from the Reports module in Web Dispatch. This chapter
discusses the following functions:
Entering sales ordersdescribed in Entering Sales Orders on page 288.
Entering purchase ordersdescribed in Entering Purchase Orders on page 297.
LOC Entering transfer ordersdescribed in Entering Transfer Orders on page 293.
Entering packaging ordersdescribed in Entering Packaging Orders on page 302.

PACK
Any orders created in Web Dispatch do not update a host systemexcept to the extent that
pick /receipt confirmations or stock move transactions, as applicable, are uploaded to the host
system when a sales/transfer sales order is picked and shipped or a purchase order is received
and closed.
Note: For sales orders and purchase orders, Web order entry should only be used in
exceptional circumstances, or by warehouses that do not use a host system, since they
do not update the host.
2 8 7
ENTERING SALES ORDERS

When you create a sales order in Web Dispatch, it must be allocated and processed in the usual
fashion.
Note: Before you can use the Order Entry function to create sales orders, customers and
products must be assigned to order groups in your database. If you receive the
message that no products are available for the selected customer, this may because the
customer has not been assigned to an order group. For more information, contact your
system administrator or Radio Beacon Customer Support.
Entering a sales order involves the following steps:
1. Create a sales order. Follow the procedure in Creating a Sales Order below.
2. Add lines to the order. Follow the procedure in Adding Lines to a Sales Order on
page 289.
3. Optionally, edit or delete lines in the order. Follow the procedure in Modifying or
Deleting a Line in a Sales Order on page 292.
4. Complete the order. Follow the procedure in Completing a Sales Order on page 290.
CREATING A SALES ORDER
> To create a sales order:
2. Click the Order Entry tab.
3. Next to the Sales Order Entry selection, in the Customer field, enter the number of the
customer for whom you are creating the order.
2 8 8 CHAPTER 9 E N T E R I N G O R D E R S
4. Optionally, specify an order number for this sales order by entering it in the PKS# field, or
leave this field blank to let RADIO BEACON WMS generate the order number
automatically.
5. From the drop-down list in the Warehouse field, optionally select a warehouse from
which to pick the order. The drop-down list displays the warehouses defined for your
system. The default is the first warehouse in the list. This field can be ignored if you have
only one logical warehouse in your system.
6. Click Go. The Sales Order Entry screen is displayed.
7. Add lines to the order by following the procedure in Adding Lines to a Sales Order
below.
ADDING LINES TO A SALES ORDER
> To add lines to a sales order:
In the Product field, enter the product number, and in the Qty field, enter the quantity
you want to order, and click Add. The line is added to the order.
Depending on your configuration, you may be able to use the Lookup function to
display a list of all products the selected customer is set up to purchase, and the
availability of those products. Enter at least one character search criteria in the
Product field and click Lookup. To add a product from the list that displays, click
Add in the Get column for the product. Then enter the quantity you want to order in
the Qty field.
If you have previously saved carts of items for that customer, you can select a cart in
the Load Cart drop-down list, and click Load Cart.
E N T ER I N G S A L E S O R D ER S 2 8 9
To add more products/quantities to the order, repeat this procedure.
To save the lines to a cart that can be retrieved later, click Save Cart.
To complete the order, follow the procedure in Completing a Sales Order below.
To modify or delete a line, follow the procedure in Modifying or Deleting a Line in a

Sales Order on page 292.
COMPLETING A SALES ORDER
Once you have completed a sales order, you can still edit it, before checking out. Once you
have checked out of the order, you cannot modify it through the Order Entry screen, but must
edit the Packslip Report for it; to do so, follow the procedures in Editing Sales, Work,
Packaging and Transfer Sales Orders on page 260 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data.
1. From the Sales Order Entry screen, click Complete Order. The Customer Information
screen is displayed.
2. Optionally, edit any of the fields of customer information.
3. Optionally, enter instructions for the order in any of the Instruction fields.
4. When done, click Continue to Checkout. The Additional Order Information screen is
displayed.
E N T ER I N G S A L E S O R D ER S 2 9 1
5. Optionally, in the Customer PO# field, enter the customers purchase order number for
this order.
6. Optionally, in the Date Required field, enter the date the customer would like to receive
the order, in MM/DD/YYYY format.
To complete and save the order, click Continue to Checkout. A message appears,
confirming that the order has been entered. The order will automatically appear in the
Orders module as an unallocated sales order.
To edit any lines in the order, click Modify Cart. You are returned to the first Sales
Order Entry screen. Continue by following the procedures in Modifying or Deleting
a Line in a Sales Order on page 292.
MODIFYING OR DELETING A LINE IN A SALES ORDER
You can only modify or delete lines in a sales order that has not yet been completed. If you
need to modify a line in an already-saved sales order, see the procedure in Editing Sales/
Work/Transfer/Packaging Order Line Details on page 262 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data.
> To modify or delete a line:
1. If you are on the Additional Order Information screen, click Modify Cart to return to the
first Sales Order entry screen.
2. In the line you want to edit or delete, click the quantity link under the Quantity heading.
The following dialog box appears.
To modify the quantity ordered, enter the new quantity.
To delete the line completely, enter 0 as the quantity.
4. Click OK. The line is updated or removed from the shopping cart.
ENTERING TRANSFER ORDERS

LOC The warehouse transfer functionality uses transfer sales orders followed by transfer purchase
orders to request and track the transfer of products from one site to another, via a transit site.
This two-step transfer function mirrors the physical process of transferring product out of one
warehouse and into another warehouse.
Transfer sales orders initiate the warehouse transfer. The Web order entry functionality in the
Reports module can be used to create transfer sales order and define the parameters of the
transfer operation including:
the products and quantities to transfer
the warehouse of origin (from warehouse)
the destination warehouse (to warehouse)
the transit warehouse (can also be a site en route such as, on the water, on the road, or
in a temporary location)
The transfer sales order is used to pick and pack the items that will be shipped out of the from
warehouse. Transfer sales orders created in Web Dispatch must be allocated and processed in
the same way as regular sales orders. Transfer sales orders can also be edited and viewed in the
same way as regular sales orders, except that in the Web Dispatch interface, their status is
preceded with TRANS; for example TRANSUNALLOCATE, TRANSHELDSHORT, etc.
E N T E R I N G T R A N S F E R O R D ER S 2 9 3
Entering a sales order involves the following steps:
1. Create a sales order. Follow the procedure in Creating a Transfer Order below.
2. Add lines to the order. Follow the procedure in Adding Lines to a Transfer Order on
page 295.
Deleting a Line in a Sales Order on page 292.
4. Complete the order. Follow the procedure in Completing a Sales Order on page 290.
CREATING A TRANSFER ORDER
> To create a transfer sales order:
3. Next to the Transfer Order Entry selection, in the From Warehouse field, select the
warehouse of origin from the drop-down list. The drop-down list displays the warehouses
defined for your system.
4. In the Transit Warehouse field, select the transit warehouse from the drop-down list. The
transit warehouse can also be a site en route such as, on the water, on the road, or in
a temporary location. The drop-down list displays the warehouses defined for your system.
5. In the To Warehouse field, select the destination warehouse from the drop-down list. The
drop-down list displays the warehouses defined for your system.
6. Click Go. The Sales Order Entry screen is displayed.
7. Add lines to the order by following the procedure in Adding Lines to a Transfer Order
below.
ADDING LINES TO A TRANSFER ORDER
Depending on your configuration, you may be able to display a list of all products that can be
transferred, by using the Lookup function. Product availability may also be indicated.
> To add lines to a transfer sales order:
display a list of all products that can be transferred, and the availability of those
products. Enter at least one character search criteria in the Product field and click
Lookup. To add a product from the list that displays, click Add in the Get column for
the product. Then enter the quantity you want to order in the Qty field.
To complete the order, follow the procedure in Completing a Transfer Order below.

Sales Order on page 292.
E N T E R I N G T R A N S F E R O R D ER S 2 9 5
COMPLETING A TRANSFER ORDER
You can still edit a transfer sales before completing the order. Once completed, you cannot
modify it through the Order Entry screen, but must edit the Packslip Report for it; to do so,
follow the procedures in Editing Sales, Work, Packaging and Transfer Sales Orders on
page 260 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders and Warehouse Data.
1. From the Transfer Order Entry screen, click Complete Order. You receive a message that
the transfer order is created.
MODIFYING OR DELETING A LINE IN A TRANSFER ORDER
You can only modify or delete lines in a transfer sales order that has not yet been completed. If
you need to modify a line in an already-saved transfer sales order, see the procedure in Editing
Sales/Work/Transfer/Packaging Order Line Details on page 262 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders
and Warehouse Data.
3. Click OK. The line is updated or removed from the order.
ENTERING PURCHASE ORDERS

When you create a purchase order in Web Dispatch, it is received into the warehouse in the
usual fashion. However, depending on your configuration, the order may need to be released
before it can be received; for information on releasing purchase orders, see Releasing
Purchase Orders on page 177.
Entering a purchase order involves the following steps:
1. Create a purchase order. Follow the procedure in Creating a Purchase Order below.
2. Add lines to the order. Follow the procedure in Adding Lines to a Purchase Order on
page 298.
Deleting a Line in a Purchase Order on page 301.
4. Complete the order. Follow the procedure in Completing a Purchase Order on page 299.
CREATING A PURCHASE ORDER
> To create a purchase order:
E NT E R I N G P U R C H A S E O R D ER S 2 9 7
3. Next to the Purchase Order Entry selection, in the Vendor field, enter the number of the
vendor whose product you want to purchase.
4. Optionally, specify a PO number for this purchase order by entering it in the PO# field, or
leave this field blank to let RADIO BEACON WMS generate the PO number automatically.
5. Click Go. The Purchase Order Entry screen is displayed.
6. Add lines to the order by following the procedure in Adding Lines to a Purchase Order
below.
ADDING LINES TO A PURCHASE ORDER
Depending on your configuration, you may be able to display a list of all products for the
selected vendor, by using the Lookup function. Product availability may also be indicated. In
the following procedure, the Lookup function is not described.
> To add lines to a purchase order:
display a list of all products setup for the selected vendor, and the quantity of those
products in stock in the warehouse. Enter at least one character search criteria in the
Product field and click Lookup. To add a product from the list that displays, click
Add in the Get column for the product. Then enter the quantity you want to order in
the Qty field.
If you have previously saved carts of items for that vendor you can select a cart in
the Load Cart drop-down list, and click Load Cart.
To save the lines to a cart that can be retrieved later, click Save Cart.
To complete the order, follow the procedure in Completing a Purchase Order below.

Purchase Order on page 301.
COMPLETING A PURCHASE ORDER
Once you have completed a purchase order, you can still edit it, before checking out. Once
you have checked out of the order, you cannot modify it through the Order Entry screen, but
must edit the Purchase Order Report for it; to do so, follow the procedures in Editing Purchase
Orders and Transfer Purchase Orders on page 263 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data.
> To complete a purchase order:
1. From the Purchase Order Entry screen, click Complete Order. The Additional Order
Information screen is displayed.
2. Optionally, in the Due Date field, enter the date you would like to receive the order, in
MM/DD/YYYY format.
To complete and save the order, click Continue to Checkout. A message appears,
confirming that the order has been entered. The order will automatically appear in the
Receiving module as an unreceived purchase order.
To edit any lines in the order, click Modify Cart. You are returned to the first Purchase
Order Entry screen. Continue by following the procedures in Modifying or Deleting
a Line in a Purchase Order below.
MODIFYING OR DELETING A LINE IN A PURCHASE ORDER
You can only modify or delete lines in a purchase order that has not yet been completed. If you
need to modify a line in an already-saved purchase order, see the procedure in Editing or
Deleting Purchase Order Line Details on page 265 of Chapter 8, Editing Orders and
Warehouse Data.
1. If you are on the Additional Order Information screen, click Modify Cart to return to the
first Purchase Order entry screen.
4. Click OK. The line is updated or removed from the shopping cart.
ENTERING PACKAGING ORDERS

If your warehouse uses packaging orders to repackage products into different packsizes, you
PACK can use the Web Order Entry feature to create packaging orders for any packaging item
defined, for any packsize and quantity you wish. Note that the inventory must be available in
an overstock (carton) bin in the quantity you need in order for the packaging order to be
successfully created.
When you create a packaging order, RADIO BEACON WMS automatically assigns it a number,
prefixed by the packaging identifier specified in your setup, and assigns a work area, numbered
identically to the work order number. Once the order is created, it is automatically allocated,
and replenishment requests are generated to move the product from overstock to the designated
work area.
> To create a packaging order:
3. Next to the Packaging Order Entry selection, in the Product field, enter the number of
the product to be repackaged.
4. Optionally, in the Zone From field, enter the zone from which you want the stock to be
allocated. If you leave this field blank, stock will be allocated from the first zone in which
it is available in a carton bin.
5. In the Packsize To field, enter the packsize that is required for the product.
6. In the Quantity to Build field, enter the number of packs that are required to be built.
7. Click Go. If there is not enough inventory in a carton bin in the zone you specified, the
message Not enough units available is displayed. Otherwise, a message is displayed that
the order has been successfully created.
8. Click OK to return to the Order Entry screen. The order automatically appears in the
Orders table, in the status PKG - WAITING LETDOWN, and stock for the order can be
replenished immediately.
10 USING ADVANCE
REPLEN
REPLENISHMENT
UNDERSTANDING ADVANCE REPLENISHMENT

Advance replenishment is a technique that allows you to request replenishment for pick bins in
advance of sales and work order requirements. By using advance replenishment, pick bins can
be filled before orders are even issued, and orders can be successfully allocated the first time,
avoiding the need to issue hot replenishment requests for the necessary stock.
RADIO BEACON WMS supports two types of advance replenishment: min/max and days on
hand. If you are using advance replenishment in your warehouse, your system will be
configured to use one or the other. For min/max replenishment, see Min/Max Replenishment
on page 303 below. For days on hand replenishment, see Days on Hand Replenishment on
page 304.
MIN/MAX REPLENISHMENT
In min/max replenishment, replenishment requests are issued for products that have dropped
below a defined minimum for specific bins/packsizes, or for all other pick bins in the
warehouse. The advance replenishment function compares the amount of inventory in bins
where a minimum has been defined for a specific packsize and a range of pick bins that you
specify (without a minimum defined for them), against the minimum amount, for one of the
five standard packsizes of a given product. If there is not enough inventory, a replenishment
request is created (assuming that bulk stock is available for replenishment). The quantities
requested are determined by a defined maximum quantity of product that can be stored for each
product for specific bins, or for all bins in the warehouse.
3 0 3
To use this method, your warehouse must have already defined minimum and maximum levels
for each product/packsize or product/bin/packsize in the warehouse, through the Set Replen
Levels or Pickslots (if your warehouse uses sticky homes) functions on the handheld. For more
information, see Setting or Modifying Replenishment Levels or Setting or Modifying
Replenishment Levels for a Specific Bin in Using RADIO BEACON Handheld Functions.
Note: If your warehouse does not use sticky homes, advance replenishment requests will not
be issued for specific bins if there are no longer any quantities of the particular
product in the bin for which the minimum level is defined.
DAYS ON HAND REPLENISHMENT
In this method, replenishment requests are issued for products which have less inventory in
pick bins for the five standard packsizes than is estimated to be required, for each of those
sizes, to meet the demand for a time period you specify. The advance replenishment function
compares the amount of inventory in all of the pick bins against the estimated amount required
to satisfy a given number of days of picking. If there is not enough stock, a replenishment
request is created (assuming that bulk storage is available to replenish from). By default, the
quantities requested are for only enough stock to bring the pick bins up to the given number of
days of picking; however, you can also specify a greater number of days, so that more product
than is needed to satisfy the estimated demand is actually replenished.
To use this method, the average daily quantity of picks must be maintained for each product.
This is done by the Calculate Demand Requirements function in RFBase, which may be run
daily and calculates the average number of picks per day for each product for the previous
month, or for the previous 30 days (rolling), depending on your configuration. This average is
then used to estimate the quantities of products that are required on a daily basis.
3 0 4 CHAPTER 10 U S I N G A D V AN C E R E P L E N I S H M E N T
RUNNING THE ADVANCE REPLENISHMENT

FUNCTION
Regardless of which type of advance replenishment your warehouse uses, you use the Advance
Replenishment function from Web Dispatch to first generate an Advance Replenishment
Report, and then generate the actual replenishment requests that are used by warehouse staff to
perform their replenishment tasks.
Note: If you run the advance replenishment function several times, the quantities to
replenish are incremented, even if products still already have outstanding
replenishment requests. Thus, it is recommended that you only run advance
replenishment after all of the existing requests have been fulfilled.
Running the Advance Replenishment function involves the following steps:
2. Click the Inventory tab to display the Inventory Reports screen.
3. Next to the Advance Replenishment Report selection, click Go.
or,
Next to the Replenishment Report selection, click Go. Outstanding replenishment

requests, if any, are displayed. (You should wait for these to be cleared before running
Advance Replenishment). Right-click anywhere in the screen, and from the pop-up menu
that is displayed, select Advance Replenishment.
R U N NI N G T H E A D V A N C E R E P L E N I SH M E NT F U N CT I O N 3 0 5
4. The Advance Replenishment Settings window is displayed, for either min/max or days on
hand replenishment, according to your system configuration.
5. Optionally, modify advance replenishment options, according to the method you are using.
Information about these options is provided in Understanding and Modifying Advance
Replenishment Options on page 307.
6. Click Submit to run the Advance Replenishment Report before actually generating any
replenishment requests, for evaluation purposes. The Advance Replenishment Report is
displayed.
7. Review the report.
8. Optionally, repeat steps 3 to 7 to re-run the Advance Replenishment report, and modify
any settings, if necessary.
9. When you are satisfied with the results of the report and are ready to generate the
replenishment requests, right-click anywhere on the Advanced Replenishment report, and
from the pop-up menu that is displayed, select Issue Replenishment Request option. In
the box that displays click Submit. The replenishment requests are generated, and the
Replenishment Report is (re)displayed, including the requests that were generated for the
advance group.
UNDERSTANDING AND MODIFYING ADVANCE REPLENISHMENT

OPTIONS
For both types of advance replenishment, min/max and days on hand, you can modify the
following options:
Option Use to...

Location If RADIO BEACON WMS is managing multiple locations, specify
LOC the physical location(s) for which bins should be replenished. If
you leave the field blank, all locations will be included.
Starting Pick Bin Limit the range of pick bins for which RADIO BEACON WMS will
issue replenishment requests. Enter the starting pick bin. If you
leave this field blank, all bins in the zones included in your
system configuration will be included.
Option Use to...

Ending Pick Bin Limit the range of pick bins for which RADIO BEACON WMS will
issue replenishment requests. Enter the ending pick bin. If you
leave this field blank, all bins in the zones included in your
system configuration will be included.
Maximum # SKUs to Limit the number of products for which replenishment requests
Call For should be generated, to control replenishers workloads. Only the
products with the least amount of inventory will be replenished.
For example, if you enter 50, replenishment requests will only be
generated for the 50 products in your warehouse with the least
amount of inventory. If you leave this field blank, a default of 100
is used.
Include Replenish Include zones in which to search for available products to
ZONE Zones replenish pick bins. If you leave this field blank, all zones are
searched.
Replenishment Group Assign a name to the group of replenishment requests that will be
issued. This name appears in the Letdown Stock replenishment
function on the handheld (for information, see Letting Down
Stock in Using RADIO BEACON Handheld Functions). By
using a meaningful name, you can indicate to replenishers the
urgency or priority of the replenishment request, or a destination
to which the stock should be brought.
If you do not specify a replenishment group name, the issued
replenishment requests will be assigned to the group ADVANCE
by default.
For days on hand replenishment, you can modify the following additional options:
Option Use to...

Minimum # of Days Specify the minimum number of days worth of products that
Trigger should be in pick bins. Any products that do not have inventory to
fulfill orders for this number of days will be replenished. The
default is 1 (i.e. any products with less than one days worth of
stock on hand will be replenished). If you modify the default, you
may also need to enter a value greater than the quantity you
specify here in the Replenish # of Days field (see below).
Replenish # of Days Specify the number of days worth of product that should be
replenished to pick bins. The default is 15 (i.e. 15 days worth of
stock will be requested for replenishment). Be sure that the
quantity here is greater than that specified in the Minimum # of
Days field (see above).
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Web Dispatch offers several mechanisms for troubleshooting warehouse processes in RADIO
BEACON WMS:
Log reports Log reports can help you or Radio Beacon support staff trace the history of
a problem you may be encountering. Described in Using the Log Reports on page 311.
Test database The Create Test Database function allows you to generate a snapshot of
your actual database in its current state, which can then be sent to Radio Beacon support
staff for analysis. Described in Creating a Test Order Database on page 316.
USING THE LOG REPORTS

Log reports are of three types:
Log Lookup Reportshows all log entries on a selected date sorted by users, activities,
bins, orders, or products. This report is only available from the Reports module.
Log report for a selected product, bin, sales order, or purchase ordershows cumulative
entries since the last time the database was purged (this is determined by your system
configuration). These reports are only accessible with the Log button on the Product, Bin,
Packslip, and Purchase Order Report screens, for users with the required permissions.
Error Reportaccessible from the Reports module, this report displays errors that may
have been generated during a particular action, and can help Radio Beacon support staff
identify the cause of a software failure.
These reports are described in the sections following.
3 1 1
GENERATING THE LOG LOOKUP REPORT
This report shows all log entries for a selected date, sorted by user ID, action, bin, product,
sales, work, or purchase order. Each report shows the action that was performed, the result, and
any error messages, if applicable.
Note: The dates available for selection are determined by your configuration. The default is
within the last 6 months. If you would like to view an extended, historical log report
for a product, bin, sales, purchase order, or bin, see Generating the Log Reports on
page 314.
3 1 2 CHAP TER 11 T R O U B L E S H O O T I N G
> To generate a log lookup report:
3. Next to the Log Lookup selection, in the Date field, enter the date for which you want to
view data, or leave the field blank to select todays date.
4. From the Action drop-down box, select any of the following:
User ID Sorts the report according to user ID.
Extended Sorts the report according to extended product number.
Binlabel Sorts the report according to bin number.
Action Sorts the report according to the type of action that was performed, such as
move in, move out, replenishment, allocation, and so on.
Packslip Sorts the report according to order number (sales, purchase, or work
orders are included).
5. When ready to display the report, click Go.
U S I NG T H E L O G R E P O R T S 3 1 3
GENERATING THE LOG REPORTS
Log reports show all log entries for the previous number of months specified in your
configuration. (The default is six months.) The number of records displayed is also determined
by your configuration; the default is the 2000 most recent records. You can also filter the
reports to show only the log entries for a selected product, order, or bin, or any combination
thereof.
Each report shows the action that was performed, the result, and any error messages, if
applicable. These reports are helpful for troubleshooting problems with orders, debugging
allocation failures due to wrong formats, and so on.
The example shown below is the log report for sales order 1000002.
> To generate a log report for a selected product, bin, or order:
In the Product, Packslip, Purchase Order or Bin Detail report screens, click the Log button.
GENERATING THE ERRORS REPORT
The Error Report shows any run-time errors and warnings returned by the software when any
function was accessed on the date specified for the report. This report may be used to help
Radio Beacon support or development staff troubleshoot software problems that you may be
encountering.
> To generate an error report:
3. Next to the Errors on date selection, in the Date field, enter the date for which you want
to view errors and warnings, or leave the field blank to select todays date.
4. Click Go.
U S I NG T H E L O G R E P O R T S 3 1 5
CREATING A TEST ORDER DATABASE

If you need to report an incident to Radio Beacon Technical Support personnel, and would like
to submit a snapshot of your database, you can create a test order database for selected
orders, provided that the RBTest database has already been created on your SQL Server (for
information, contact your system administrator). All the relevant data for the orders you select,
including product, customer, vendor, and order information, as well as your entire
configuration (including users, bins, and all selected options) will automatically be included.
The test order database will be updated on your SQL Server, and a system administrator can
back up the database to a disk file that can be submitted to Radio Beacon.
1. Select the order(s) for which you want to create a test database. For procedures for
selecting orders, see General Procedures for Processing Orders on page 44.
2. Right-click anywhere on the screen you are using, and from the pop-up menu, select Test
Order Database. The Test Order Database window is displayed.
3. Click Submit. When the test database is created, a message is displayed.
INDEX
NUMERICS Advance Replenishment options 307

Ending Pick Bin 308
100% Fill 75 Include Replenish Zones 308
Location 307
Maximum# SKUs to Call For 308
A Minimum# of Days Trigger 309
Activity Monitor Report 250 Replenish# of Days 309
Activity Report 252 Replenishment Group 308
Ad Hoc SQL Report 255 Starting Pick Bin 307
Add Assembly 274, 276 Advance Replenishment Report 305
Add ServItem 271 alert 23
Add Subcomponent 271 Allocate options
Add Text Line 280 100% Fill 75
adding Allocate To 72, 73, 151
customers 283 Assembly Label Printing 153
kits 274 Assume Infinite Stock 75
lines to purchase orders 266, 298 Attribute/Expiry/Packsize 74, 152
lines to sales orders 289 Auto Short All 75
lines to transfer sales orders 295 Auto Short Non-Stocks 75
orders to bills of lading 126 By Zone Sequence 78, 153
orders to manifests 126 Days to Expiry 74, 152
packaging item 276 Deplete Smaller Packsize 71, 151
products 269 Exclude Zones 73
service items to kits 271 Fair Share 73
vendors 285 FIFO 71, 151
Adjustments Report 241 Fifty Rule 72
administrative functions 3 General 71, 150
advance replenishment 303 Hold for Replenishment 76
days on hand 304 Hold for Shorts 75
min/max 303 Include Zones 73, 77
3 1 7
Include Zones for Kitting 153 assembly info 145

LIFO 71, 151 Assembly Label Printing option 153
Location 73, 151 assembly label, printing 153
Optimize 78, 153 ASSEMBLY-BEING BUILT status 30
Quantity Ordered 72, 73, 151 ASSEMBLY-COMPLETE status 30
Quantity to Pick 72, 73, 151 ASSEMBLY-READY status 29, 154
Replenishment 76 ASSEMBLY-SHORT status 29, 154
Replenishment Group 77 ASSEMBLY-UNALLOCATED status 29
Reserve Minimum 72, 151 ASSEMBLY-WAIT REPLEN status 29, 154
Short if not Ready 76 Assign Next BOL Number option 96
Shorts 75 Assign Work options 102
Stock Method 71, 151 Exclude Zones 103
Allocate To options 72, 151 Include Zones 103
Fair Share 73 assigning 95
Fifty Rule 72 BOL/manifest numbers to orders 96
Quantity Ordered 72 consolidation numbers to orders 96
Quantity to Pick 72 incidents to users 194
Reserve Minimum 72, 151 next BOL number to orders 96
allocating replenishment groups 77, 308
sales orders 67 Assume Infinite Stock option 75
work orders 147 ATS 137
allocation results attribute
sales order 78 mixing in allocation 74, 152
work order 154 Attribute/Expiry/Packsize Allocation option 74,
Already Picked Goods options 122, 157 152
Return to Stock 122 Auto Short All option 75
Return to TRANSIT 122 Auto Short Non-Stocks option 75
Ship 122, 157
APPROVED status 31
assembly B
adding 274, 276 Backorder options
adding service items to 271 Cancel Remainder 124
adding subcomponents to 271 OK to Backorder 124
deleting 275 batch pick label, printing 105
deleting service items from 273 BEING PICKED status 28
deleting subcomponents from 273 BEING RECEIVED status 31
editing 273 BEING REPACKED status 28
editing service items 273
3 1 8
bill of lading 125 Clear Rating Errors option 116

adding orders to 126 client filter 24
editing 128 clone picking 135
printing 128 closing
viewing 128 incidents 197
bill of lading number 95 purchase orders 299
Bin Detail Report 237 completing
Bin Inventory Report 238 purchase orders 299
BOL 95, 125 sales orders 290
adding orders to 126 transfer sales orders 296
editing 128 component
printing 128 adding to kits 271
viewing 128 deleting from kits 273
BOL number 95 editing 273
BOL Report 128 configuring
BOL/Manifest Number option 96 screens 9
configuring grids 9
Consolidate if Possible option 109
C consolidating orders 95, 109
Calculate Demand Requirements function 163, consolidation number 96
304 Consolidation Number option 96
Cancel & Unallocate option 123, 157 Container Lookup 228
Cancel Remainder function 124 Container Report 228
Cancelling 156 container, creating 182
cancelling Cost of Shipping 117
purchase orders 179 Create a Delivery Report 130
sales order 120 Create Container 182
work order 156 creating
Capture Barcode option 97 containers 182
Carrier Label 94 customers 283
Carrier Service option 92 deliveries from sales orders 130
Carton Contents Label option 94 incidents 194
Carton Ship option 114 kits 274
carton statuses 63 packaging item 276
Change Payment Method option 92 packaging order 162, 302
changing products 269
carrier/service 92 purchase orders 297
payment method 92 sales orders 287
choosing printers 107, 153 test order database 316
3 1 9
transfer purchase order in Web Dispatch 190 Delete Unused Labels option 112
transfer sales orders 293 deleting
vendors 285 kits 275
Crystal Pick Ticket option 106 lines from purchase orders 266, 301
customer lines from sales orders 292
adding 283 lines from transfer sales orders 296
maintenance 282 packaging item 281
modifying 282 purchase orders 179
Customer Label sales order 120
Ship option 93 service items from kits 273
Wave option 105, 106 subcomponents from kits 273
Customer Report 213 text line from packaging item 281
Cycle Count Accuracy Report 251 work order 156
Cycle Count Report 240 Delivery Report 130
Cycle Time Report 254 delivery, from sales orders 130
details screen 15
Dispatcher Settings Report 46
D Display Hold Message option 97
Daily Receipts Report 230
Daily Receiving Report 229
Daily Sales Report 247 E
Daily Shipping Report 219 editing
database tables 256 BOLs 128
database, creating test 316 customer information 282
Date Shipped option 117 default settings 46
days on hand replenishment 304 incidents 197
Minimum# of Days Trigger 309 lines in purchase orders 265, 301
Replenish# of Days 309 lines in sales orders 292
Days to Expiry option 74, 152 lines in sales/work orders 262
default settings, editing 46 lines in transfer sales orders 296
Delete PO 179 manifests 128
Delete PO options 180 packaging item 278
Delete 181 product information 267
Mark as Backordered 181 purchase orders 263
Mark as Complete 181 sales/work orders 259
Mark as Incomplete 181 service items in kits 273
Report to Host 181 subcomponents in kits 273
Unreceived Goods 181 vendor information 284
Upload 181 Employee Statistics Report 253
3 2 0
Empty Bin Report 238 filtering

End of Line data in columns 10
Ship option 93 orders by client 24
Wave option 103 orders by location 25
Ending Pick Bin option 308 orders by product 24
end-of-line 59, 93, 103 orders by warehouse 24
entering
packaging order 162, 302
purchase orders 297
G
sales orders 287 grid configuration 9
transfer sales orders 293
error, clearing shipping 116 H
Exception Report 85
handle 25
Exclude Zones
handling 87
Allocate option 73
HELD FORMAT orders 83
Wave option 103
short orders 81
exiting Web Dispatch 48
WAIT PRE-RATE orders 87
expediting sales order 120
HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT status 27, 79
expiry date
HELD FORMAT orders, handling 83
allocating 74, 152
HELD FORMAT status 27, 80
mixing in allocation 74, 152
held order, handling 85
exporting manifest 137
HELD SHORT status 26, 79
EXTERNAL status 28, 124
Hold for Packing Slip option 123
Hold for Replenishment option 76
Hold for Shorts option 75
F
Fair Share option 73
FIFO 71, 151 I
allocation 71, 151 Ignore Required Date option 116
Fifty Rule option 72 incident 17
filter 22 assigning 194
clear 12 closing 197
client 24 creating 194
location 25 editing 197
product 24 options 195
warehouse 24 overview 193
re-assigning 197
resolving 197
viewing assigned 195, 196
3 2 1
Include Replenish Zones option 308 Labels options

Include Scanned Orders option 116 Crystal Pick Ticket 106
Include Shipped Orders option 116 Customer Label 106
Include Unscanned Orders option 116 Labels Per Order 105, 108
Include Zones Packing Planner 106
Allocate option 73, 77 Pick Ticket 106
Wave option 103 Pre-Packslip 106
Include Zones for Kitting option 153 Sort Slapper Labels 107
Incremental Slotting Report 249 Start with 1 Label 105, 108
Inventory Reports 206 Use Calculated Qty 105, 108
Labels Per Order options
Start with 1 Label 105, 108
K Use Calculated Qty 105, 108
kit launch bar 12
adding 274 License Plate Report 239
adding service items to 271 LIFO 71, 151
adding subcomponents to 271 allocation 71, 151
deleting 275 Limit Wave Size options 102, 108
deleting service items from 273 Max# Lines 102
deleting subcomponents from 273 Max# Orders 102, 108
editing service items 273 Max# Units 102
editing subcomponents 273 limiting wave sizes 102
line
adding to purchase orders 266, 298
L adding to sales orders 289
label adding to transfer sales orders 295
deleting unused 112 deleting from purchase orders 266, 301
printing batch pick 105 deleting from sales orders 292
printing carrier 94 deleting from transfer sales orders 296
printing carton contents 94 editing in purchase orders 265
printing Crystal pick ticket 106 editing in sales/work orders 262
printing customer 106 statuses, purchase order 173
printing packing planner 106 statuses, sales order 57
printing pick ticket 106 statuses, work order 144
printing pre-packslip 106 linked orders 108
List Assigned Incidents 196
List Created Incidents 195
3 2 2
Location Maximum# SKUs to Call For option 308

Advance Replenishment option 307 min/max advance replenishment 303
Allocate option 73, 151 Minimum# of Days Trigger option 309
location filter 25 Miscellaneous Reports 207
location, specifying for allocation 73, 151 modifying
LOCKED status 27 carrier/service 92
Log Lookup Report 312 customer information 282
Log Report 314 default settings 46
logging on 2 lines in purchase orders 265
lines in sales orders 292
lines in sales/work orders 262
M lines in transfer sales orders 296
maintaining packaging item 276, 278
customer information 281 payment method 92
kits 269 product information 267
packaging item 276 purchase orders 263
products 266 sales/work orders 259
vendor information 283 service items in kits 273
manifest 95, 125 subcomponents in kits 273
adding orders to 126 vendor information 284
editing 128 Monitor module 250
exporting to text file 137 Multi-Pack Packaging Report 164
printing 128
viewing 128
Manifest Report 137, 220 N
Mark as Backordered option 181 navigating Web Dispatch 7
Mark as Checked-In option 114 NOT RECEIVED status 31
Mark as Complete option 181 Notify ShipSys options
Mark as Incomplete option 181 Ignore Required Date 116
Mark as Shipped options Include Scanned Orders 116
Cost of Shipping option 117 Include Shipped Orders 116
Date Shipped 117 Include Unscanned Orders 116
Release for Upload 117 Nuke & Delete option 124, 158
Shipment Number 117 Nuke options
marking orders as shipped 117 Already Picked Goods 122, 157
Max# Lines option 102 Backorder 124, 158
Max# Orders option 102, 108 Cancel & Allocate 123, 157
Max# Units option 102 Cancel Remainder 124
Maximum Days option 168 Hold for Packing Slip 123
3 2 3
Nuke & Delete 124, 158 P

OK to Backorder 124
Pack & Hold option 109
Packing Slip 123
PACK & HOLD status 27, 110
Pick & Relieve 123
Package options
Release Without 123
Maximum # Days 168
Report to Host 124, 158
Quantity Override 168
Report to Host options 124, 158
packaging item
Return to Stock 122
adding 276
Return to TRANSIT 122
adding text lines for 280
sales order 121
Ship 122, 157 deleting 281
Show Actual Qty 124, 158 deleting text line 281
Unpicked Goods 123, 157 editing 278
work order 157 maintaining 276
nuking velocity 163
results 124 Packaging Item List 276
sales order 120 packaging order
creating 162
work order 156, 157
entering 302
PKG-BEING BUILT status 30
O PKG-READY TO PRINT status 30
PKG-WAITING LETDOWN status 30
OK to Backorder option 124
SHIPPED AND UPLOADED status 30
Open Warehouse Transits Report 246
types of 159
Optimize options
Packaging Report 164
By Zone Sequence 78, 153
packing and holding orders 109
Deplete Smaller Packsize 71, 151
Packing Planner option 106
order
Packing Slip options
adding lines to 289, 295
Hold for Packing Slip 123
allocating 67 Release Without 123
editing 259 packsize, mixing in allocation 74, 152
editing lines 262 Packslip Report 38, 56, 143, 169, 214
selecting 40 palletize 108
Order Consolidation Opportunities Report 215 Performance Reports 206
Orders detail table 15 Pick & Relieve option 123
orders summary screen 14 Pick Ticket option 106
Picked, Unshipped Inventory Report 247
Picker Activity Report 253
Picking Reports 204
3 2 4
picking sales order from Web Dispatch 128 BEING RECEIVED 31

picking/shipping label, printing 106, 107 BEING REPACKED 28
pivot 18 EXTERNAL 28, 124
Orders module 19 HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT 27, 79
Receiving module 21 HELD FORMAT 27, 80
PKG-BEING BUILT status 30 HELD SHORT 26, 79
PKG-READY TO PRINT status 30 LOCKED 27
PKG-WAITING LETDOWN status 30 NOT RECEIVED 31
PO/Manifest Report 38, 221 PACK & HOLD 27, 110
Pre-Packslip option 106 PKG-BEING BUILT 30
Pre-Rate option 98 PKG-READY TO PRINT 30
pre-rating PKG-WAITING LETDOWN 30
sales orders 98 purchase orders, overview 30
skipping 87 RATING 28
Printer# Wave option 107 READY TO SHIP 28
printers, selecting 107, 153 READY TO UPLOAD 29, 31, 124
printing READY TO WAVE 27, 78, 110
assembly labels 153 RECORD SHIPMENT 28
batch pick labels 105 REQUISTION 31
BOLs 128 sales orders, overview 26
carrier labels 94 SHIPPED AND UPLOADED 29, 30
carton contents labels 94 SUSPENDED 29, 79
Crystal pick tickets 106 transfer purchase orders, overview 30
customer labels 93, 106 UNALLOCATED 26, 79
manifests 128 UPLOADED 31
packing planners 106 WAIT PRE-RATE 27, 80
pick tickets 106 WAITING - SWOG 27, 79
picking/shipping labels 106, 107 WAITING BOL# 28
pre-packslip labels 106 WAVED 27
process flag 59 work orders, overview 29, 30
process step 26 product
APPROVED 31 adding 269
ASSEMBLY-BEING BUILT 30 modifying 267
ASSEMBLY-COMPLETE 30 velocity 163
ASSEMBLY-READY 29, 154 product filter 24
ASSEMBLY-SHORT 29, 154 Product Inventory Report 81, 236
ASSEMBLY-UNALLOCATED 29 Product Report 235
ASSEMBLY-WAIT REPLEN 29, 154 Product Reports 234
BEING PICKED 28
3 2 5
purchase order READY TO SHIP status 28

adding lines to 266, 298 READY TO UPLOAD status 29, 31, 124
APPROVED status 31 READY TO WAVE status 27, 78, 110
BEING RECEIVED 31 re-allocating sales orders 67
cancelling 179 re-assigning incidents 197
completing 299 receiving by container 182
creating 297 receiving purchase order in Web Dispatch 188
creating RMA 186 Receiving Report by PO 227
deleting lines from 266 Receiving Reports 205
editing 263 Recent drop-down list 26
editing lines 265, 301 RECORD SHIPMENT status 28
line statuses 173 Refresh 9
NOT RECEIVED status 31 refresh, summary screen 34
READY TO UPLOAD status 31 Release for Ready-Wave option 88
receiving in Web Dispatch 188 Release for Upload option 117
REQUISITION status 31 Release Options
statuses 30 Consolidate if Possible 109
transfer purchase order 30 Pack & Hold 109
UPLOADED status 31 Wait All Linked Orders 108
Purchase Order Report 221 releasing
held orders 85
SWOG orders 87
Q Replenish# of Days option 309
Quantity Ordered 72 replenishing orders 76
Quantity Ordered option 72 Replenishment Group
Quantity Override option 168 Advance Replenishment option 308
Quantity to Pick 72 Allocate option 77
Quantity to Pick option 72 replenishment group
quick launch bar 12 assigning 308
Quick Order Completion 128 Replenishment options
Quick Purchase Order Completion 188, 190 Hold for Replenishment 76
Include Zones 77
Include Zones for Kitting 153
R Replenishment Group 77
Radio Beacon Short if not Ready 76
contact info xiv Replenishment Report 81, 244
Web site xiv replenishment, advance 303
RATING status 28
3 2 6
report Product Inventory 81, 236

Activity 252 Products 234
Activity Monitor 250 Purchase Order 221
Ad Hoc SQL 255 Quick Order Completion 128
Adjustments 241 Quick Purchase Order Completion 188, 190
Advance Replenishment 305 Receiving by PO 227
Bin Detail 237 Replenishment 81, 244
Bin Inventory 238 Reserved Stock 245
BOL 128 RMA Issued 230
Container 228 Rush Items 81
container 130 Rush Products 243
Customer 213 Shipment Lookup 220
Cycle Count 240 Shipping Errors 216
Cycle Count Accuracy 251 Short Products 81, 242
Cycle Time 254 Shortage 225
Daily Receipts 230 Top 100 248
Daily Receiving 229 Truck Route 217
Daily Sales 247 Uploaded Receipts 228
Daily Shipping 219 Uploaded Shipments 218
Delivery 130 Velocity by Bin 249
Dispatcher Settings 46 Vendor 222
Employee Statistics 253 Vendor Product List 224
Empty Bin 238 Report to Host options
Exception 85 Nuke & Delete 124, 158
Incremental Slotting 249 Show Actual Qty 124, 158
License Plate 239 REQUISTION status 31
Log 314 Reserve Minimum option 72, 151
Log Lookup 312 Reserved Stock Report 245
Manifest 137, 220 resolving incidents 197
Multi-Pack Packaging 164 results
Open Warehouse Transits 246 nuking 124
Order Consolidation Opportunities 215 waving 110
Packaging 164 Return to Stock option 122
Packslip 38, 56, 143, 169, 214 Return to TRANSIT option 122
Picked, Unshipped Inventory 247 RMA Issued Report 230
Picker Activity 253 Rush Items Report 81
PO 38 Rush Products Report 243
Product 235
3 2 7
S RATING status 28
READY TO SHIP status 28
sales order
READY TO UPLOAD status 29, 124
adding lines to 289
READY TO WAVE status 27, 78, 110
allocating 67
re-allocating 67
allocation results 78
RECORD SHIPMENT status 28
BEING PICKED status 28
releasing held orders 85
BEING REPACKED status 28
releasing SWOG 87
cancelling 120
replenishment 76
changing carrier/service 92
saving 290, 296
clone picking 135 SHIPPED AND UPLOADED status 29
completing 290 shorting 75, 76
consolidating multiple 109 statuses 26
consolidation 95 SUSPENDED status 29, 79
creating 287 SUSPENDED, handling 82
creating a delivery 130 suspending 118
deleting 120 transfer sales order 26
deleting lines from 292 UNALLOCATED status 26, 79
editing 259 unallocating 88
editing lines 262, 292 unclone 137
entering 287 unsuspending 119
expediting 120 unwaving 111
EXTERNAL status 28, 124 WAIT PRE-RATE status 27, 80
HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT status 27, 79 WAIT PRE-RATE, handling 87
HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT, handling 81 WAITING - SWOG status 27, 79
HELD FORMAT status 27, 80 WAITING - SWOG, handling 87
HELD FORMAT, handling 83 WAITING BOL# status 28
HELD SHORT status 26, 79 WAVED status 27, 110
HELD SHORT, handling 81 waving 99
held, handling 85 saving
holding short 75 purchase orders 299
line statuses 57 sales orders 290
linked 108
transfer sales orders 296
LOCKED status 27
screen, configuration 9
marking as shipped 117
selecting
PACK & HOLD status 27, 110 orders 40
packing and holding 109
printers 107, 153
picking from Web Dispatch 128
pre-rating 98
3 2 8
service item SHIPPED AND UPLOADED status 29, 30

adding to kits 271 shipping
deleting from kits 273 clearing errors 116
editing in kit 273 systems 115
settings, editing default 46 Shipping Check-In Actions 97
Ship options Capture Barcode 97
Assign Next BOL Number 96 Display Hold Message 97
BOL/Manifest Number 96 Shipping Controls options
Capture Barcode 97 Assign Next BOL Number 96
Carrier Label option 94 BOL/Manifest Number 96
Carrier Service 92 Consolidation Number 96
Carton Contents Label 94 Shipping Errors Report 216
Carton Ship 114 Short if not Ready option 76
Change Payment Method 92 short order, handling 81
Clear Rating Errors 116 Short Products Report 81, 242
Consolidation Number 96 Shortage Report 225
Cost of Shipping 117 shorting sales orders 75, 76
Customer Label 93, 94 Shorts options 75
Date Shipped 117 100% Fill 75
Display Hold Message 97 Assume Infinite Stock 75
End of Line 93 Auto Short All 75
Ignore Required Date 116 Auto Short Non-Stocks 75
Include Scanned Orders 116 Hold for Shorts 75
Include Shipped Orders 116 Show Actual Qty option 124, 158
Include Unscanned Orders 116 site transfer 293
Mark as Checked-In 114 Skip Pre-Rating option 87
Mark as Shipped 117 skipping pre-rating 87
Notify Shipping System 115 Sort Slapper Labels 107
Pre-Rate 98 Starting Pick Bin option 307
Release for Ready-Wave 88 starting Web Dispatch 2
Release for Upload 117 status 79
Settings 92, 93, 94 APPROVED 31
Ship Options 92 ASSEMBLY-BEING BUILT 30
Shipment Number 117 ASSEMBLY-COMPLETE 30
Shipping Check-In Actions 97 ASSEMBLY-READY 29, 154
Shipping Controls 95, 96 ASSEMBLY-SHORT 29, 154
Skip Pre-Rating 87 ASSEMBLY-UNALLOCATED 29
Shipment Lookup Report 220 ASSEMBLY-WAIT REPLEN 29, 154
Shipment Number option 117 BEING PICKED 28
3 2 9
BEING RECEIVED 31 Stock Method options

BEING REPACKED 28 FIFO 71, 151
carton 63 LIFO 71, 151
EXTERNAL 28, 124 subcomponent
HELD FOR REPLENISHMENT 27, 79 adding to kits 271
HELD FORMAT 27, 80 deleting from kits 273
HELD SHORT 26, 79 editing in kits 273
line, purchase order 173 subcomponents 273
line, sales order 57 suspended order, handling 82
line, work order 144 SUSPENDED status 29, 79
LOCKED 27 suspending sales order 118
NOT RECEIVED 31
PACK & HOLD 27, 110
PKG-BEING BUILT 30 T
PKG-READY TO PRINT 30 tables, database 256
PKG-WAITING LETDOWN 30 test order database, creating 316
purchase order 30 text line
RATING 28 adding to packaging items 280
READY TO SHIP 28 deleting 281
READY TO UPLOAD 29, 31, 124 Top 100 Report 248
READY TO WAVE 27, 78, 110 Total Support Web site xiv
RECORD SHIPMENT 28 transfer purchase order 30
REQUISITION 31 creating in Web Dispatch 190
sales order 26 handling, SEE purchase order
SHIPPED AND UPLOADED 29, 30 processing, SEE purchase order
shipping 63 statuses 30
SUSPENDED 29, 79 transfer sales order
transfer purchase order 30 about 26
UNALLOCATED 26, 79 adding lines to 295
UPLOADED 31 completing 296
WAIT PRE-RATE 27, 80 creating 293
WAITING - SWOG 27, 79 deleting lines from 296
WAITING BOL# 28 editing lines 296
WAVED 27 entering 293
work order 29, 30 handling, SEE sales order
status bar 12 processing, SEE sales order
statuses 26
transfer, warehouse transfer function 293
Truck Route Report 217
3 3 0
U View Container 228

viewing
UNALLOCATED status 26, 79 assigned incidents 196
unallocating
BOLs 128
sales order 88
created incidents 195
work orders 155
unclone 137
Unpicked Goods options 123, 157 W
Cancel & Unallocate 123, 157
Wait All Linked Orders 108
Pick & Relieve 123
Wait All Linked Orders option 108
Unreceived Goods options
WAIT PRE-RATE orders, handling 87
Mark as Backordered 181
WAIT PRE-RATE status 27, 80
Mark as Complete 181
WAITING - SWOG orders 87
Mark as Incomplete 181
WAITING - SWOG status 27, 79
unsuspending sales order 119
WAITING BOL# status 28
Unwave option 112
warehouse filter 24
unwaving sales order 111
warehouse transfer 293
updating
Wave Label option 105
customer information 281
Wave options
kits 269
Assign Work 102
packaging item 276
Consolidate if Possible 109
products 266
Crystal Pick Ticket 106
purchase orders 263
Customer Label 105, 106
sales/work orders 259
End of Line 103
vendor information 284
Exclude Zones 103
Uploaded Receipts Report 228
Include Zones 103
Uploaded Shipments Report 218
Labels 105, 106
UPLOADED status 31
Labels Per Order 105, 108
Limit Wave Size 102, 108
V Max# Lines 102
Max# Orders 102, 108
velocity 163
Max# Units 102
Velocity by Bin Report 249
Optimize Packing 103
vendor
Pack & Hold 109
adding 285
Packing Planner 106
maintenance 284
palletize 108
modifying 284
Pick Ticket 106
Vendor Product List Report 224
Pre-Packslip 106
Vendor Report 222
Printer# 107
3 3 1
Release Options 108, 109 deleting 156

Sort Slapper Labels 107 editing 259
Wait All Linked Orders 108 editing lines 262
Wave Label 105 HELD FORMAT, handling 83
wave size, limiting 102, 108 HELD SHORT status 79
WAVED status 27, 110 line statuses 144
waving SHIPPED AND UPLOADED status 30
results 110 statuses 29, 30
sales order 99 SUSPENDED status 29, 79
Web site, Total Support xiv suspending 118
work order types of 146
allocation results 154
ASSEMBLY- BEING BUILT status 30
assembly info 145 Z
ASSEMBLY- READY status 29 zone
ASSEMBLY- SHORT status 154 excluding from allocation 73
ASSEMBLY-COMPLETE status 30 include for kitting 153
ASSEMBLY-READY status 154 include for replenishment 77
ASSEMBLY-SHORT status 29 including for advance replenishment 308
ASSEMBLY-UNALLOCATED status 29 including for allocation 73
ASSEMBLY-WAIT REPLEN status 29, 154 sequence for allocation 78, 153
cancelling 156
3 3 2

Accellos - Guide - WebDispatch - Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Accellos - Guide - WebDispatch - Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Accellos One Warehouse

Powered by RADIO BEACON

Using Web Dispatch

Copyright Accellos, Inc.

Picking a Sales Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Managing Sales and Shipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Reserved Stock Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Maintaining Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT

ABOUT OPTIONAL SOFTWARE MODULES

Web Order Entry

Integrated Shipping/End-of-Line Settings

Returned Materials Authorizations

Vendor Portal and Cross Docking

GETTING ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND

Overview of RADIO BEACON WMS

Using RADIO BEACON Handheld Functions

TOTAL SUPPORT WEB SITE

CONTACTING RADIO BEACON

Radio Beacon Support

Telephone: 1-(800) 247-9526 Ext. 2

Fax: (416) 486-2169

monospace Indicates text that you must enter exactly as shown.

1 USING THE WEB DISPATCH

Starting Web Dispatch on page 2.

About the Web Dispatch Modules on page 4.

Navigating Web Dispatch on page 7.

Selecting and Processing Orders on page 40.

Editing Default Settings on page 46.

Exiting Web Dispatch on page 48.

STARTING WEB DISPATCH

1. Start Internet Explorer.

http://<server IP address or Name>/RbDispatch/

The RADIO BEACON WMS login screen is displayed.

3. In the User Name field, enter your user ID.

4. In the Password field, enter your password.

User Name Password

ABOUT THE WEB DISPATCH MODULES

Orders See About the Orders Module on page 5.

Receiving See About the Receiving Module on page 5.

Monitor Use to monitor current processes in the warehouse. See Monitoring

Reports See About the Reports Module on page 6.

Support Links to the Radio Beacon Total Support Web site.

ABOUT THE ORDERS MODULE

Use the Orders module to do any of the following:

ABOUT THE RECEIVING MODULE

Use the Receiving module to do any of the following:

Troubleshoot purchase orders. See About the Reports Module below.

ABOUT THE REPORTS MODULE

You use the Reports module to do any of the following:

View license plate related information. Described in Chapter 7, Generating Reports.

Troubleshoot orders, products, and bins. Described in Chapter 11, Troubleshooting.

REPLEN Generate advance replenishment requests. Described in Chapter 6, Using Advance

Create returned materials authorizations (RMAs). Described in Entering RMAs on

NAVIGATING WEB DISPATCH

O rder Picking Inventory Receiving P.O .

Custom er Packslip Purchase Vendor

Custom er Product Purchase Vendor

O rder Log Product Log Bin Log O rder Log

Sales/work/packaging/purchase and transfer order summary screensDisplay summary

Sales/work/packaging/purchase and transfer order details screensDisplay details for

Packslip (Sales/Work/Packaging/Transfer Sales Order) and Purchase/Transfer Purchase

Picking, Receiving, and Inventory Reports screensAllow you to select an individual